TC 5-1 and 5-3

TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 card
Type No. 914 22 62 / 914 22 42
Operating instructions
10/2010 en
These operating instructions contain information protected by copyright. No part of these operating instruc-
tions may be copied, printed, filmed or reproduced, processed, duplicated or disseminated by any other
means, either in whole or in part, without our prior written consent.
We are not liable for damage or problems arising from the use of items of special equipment, parts and re-
placement parts which are not original Trützschler products or replacement parts.
Some of the functions described here may not be available, depending on the version and construction of
the machine.
© 2010 Trützschler GmbH & Co. KG, Mönchengladbach
Translation of the original operating instructions
All rights reserved
Trützschler GmbH & Co. KG

Textilmaschinenfabrik
D-41241 Mönchengladbach
Postfach 41 01 64
Telephone +49 2166 607-0
Fax +49 2166 607-405
E-mail info@truetzschler.de
Internet www.truetzschler.com
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About these operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Definition of machine sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Type plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Organisational measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety devices on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Symbols employed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Conventions employed in these operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Functions of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Assembly groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
TC 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
TC 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DIRECTFEED tuft feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
EASYFEED feed tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
WEBFEED licker-in unit (3 rolls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
WEBFEED licker-in unit (1 roll) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The MULTI WEBCLEAN system and the revolving flats system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Web doffing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Sliver feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Options for sliver delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The card's operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Basic keys (inch, stop, start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
T-CON – Determining the effective carding gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Daily start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Preparing the machine surroundings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Switching on the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Switching on after an emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Preparing and starting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Piecing up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Dealing with faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Can change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Manually on the coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Automatically on the can changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Manually on the can changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Optimising the carding gap with T-CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
T-CON in normal mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
T-CON flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
T-CON Gap advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Switching off the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Code levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Language and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Log book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Lot management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Machine configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cylinder drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sliver deposit system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Can diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Servo drive type depositing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Web doffer drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
T-CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Filter box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Separate flat strips suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Metal detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DFK slide valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Lap feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pulley diameter for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
DFK roll speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Webspeed OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Blade cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Can monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sliver cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Lower can changing speed for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Web thickness tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Suction pressure too low - cylinder off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Quality error acknowledge only with code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Thick spots monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Lot data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Sliver count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Delivery speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DFK target pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Minimum draft V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Maximum draft V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Change wheel MW (draft V4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Card - coiler tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Can filling quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Starting speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Slow speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Can changing speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Rotary can plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Flats speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
CV value limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Thick spot limit value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
T-CON monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
TC-NCT limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Activating communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

NCT monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Service functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
DFK active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Funnel control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Suction pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Metal detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Test door locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
NCT monitor on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Diagnostics / Statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Draft deviation and CV values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Spectrogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Thick spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
NCT data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
T-CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Putting T-CON into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Sensors / measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Displaying current measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Displaying current drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Sensors / Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Shift data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Shift calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Machine balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Mechanical settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Basic setting work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Setting the squeezing rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Selecting delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Replacing the delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setting the delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setting the flexible bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Tuft feeder feed roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
EASYFEED feed tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting the TC-PMS opening angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Calibrating the feed table thick spots monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Setting the depth of penetration of the flat strips roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Gearing diagram for rolls and drives, TC 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Gearing diagram for rolls and drives, TC 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Changing draft V3 on the stripping roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting draft V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Setting the speed of the cleaning roll for the stripper roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Setting the braking unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Setting the DFK outlet filter for transport air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Settings for 100 % cotton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Settings dependent on production and speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Licker-in, 3 rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Licker-in, 1 roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Basic setting for MTT extensions bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Revolving flats details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fixed flats in the pre-carding area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fixed flats in the post-carding area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lower cover sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Change points, drive pulleys and rotational speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Settings for 100 % polyester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Licker-in, 3 rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Licker-in, 1 roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Basic setting for MTT extensions bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Revolving flats details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fixed flats in the post-carding area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Settings for 100 % viscose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Licker-in, 3 rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Licker-in, 1 roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Settings for polyacrylic, blends and recycled material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Licker-in, 3 rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Licker-in, 1 roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Current settings on this machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
DIRECTFEED tuft feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Licker-in, 3 rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Licker-in, 1 roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Structure of a fault message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fault table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
LED displays in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Overview of the control elements in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

KSZ5 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
DEA2 data input and output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Frequency converter LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
RIK module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Inspection intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Checking and setting belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Measuring and setting the tension on the flats transport belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Checking the setpoints of the pneumatic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Checking the ICFD value (EASYFEED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Checking the T-CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Checking the valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Checking the motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Checking the drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Checking the clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
General cleaning instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Maintenance and cleaning schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Cleaning all suction hoods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Cleaning the DFK tuft feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Cleaning the comb boxes in the feed table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Cleaning the flat strips roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Cleaning revolving flats area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Cleaning the doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Cleaning the web doffing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Replacing the delivery rolls belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Guiding profile, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Cleaning the main cylinder covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Cleaning the channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Cleaning the TC-FB filter box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Servicing the TC-TS transverse web delivery belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Grinding clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Recommended service intervals for standard clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Recommended service intervals for long-life clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Grinding clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Removing and installing the suction hood and knife on the 1st licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Removing the twin top cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Replacing the strips with clothing of the twin top cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Re-installing the twin top cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Replacing the knives on MWC suction hoods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Replacing MAGNOTOP clothing strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Replacing the flats transport belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Attaching the flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Setting the graphite pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Setting the flats run monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Replacing the battery on the KSZ5 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Card lubrication schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Left-hand machine side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Right-hand machine side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Table of lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Technical specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
DFK tuft feeder dust extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Card waste suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Optional filter box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Optional flats waste suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Continuous power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
ISO 4871 noise emission values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Standard equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Options and additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Specialist terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Expendable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Anti-corrosive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Delivery in a container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Delivery without a container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Stopping the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
EC conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Introduction
Introduction
In this chapter you will find important safety instruc- About these operating
tions as well as explanations of the structure of this
set of operating instructions and the symbols and instructions
conventions employed. These operating instructions describe how to oper-
ate and service the machine correctly.
How to use this manual Initial start-up and stoppage are not contained in
these operating instructions as these tasks must be
This manual contains a description of the machine
carried out by Trützschler after-sales service staff
and then describes basic operation for every day
only. This also applies to temporary stoppage of the
usage. In the chapter, Settings, you will find full ex-
machine, for instance, if the machine is to be trans-
planations of all options for setting the machine in
ferred to another location.
order to meet to your own requirements. After the
chapter on Faults and how to remedy them, Main- Trützschler attaches great importance to you oper-
tenance is described. ating the machine safely, correctly and economical-
ly. It is therefore imperative that you read these op-
The information in these operating instructions can
erating instructions manual through carefully
be accessed in three ways:
before you start to work with the card. The opera-
– By reading the text in the order it is presented. tion instructions contain important information that
will help you to avoid hazards and to increase the
– By searching in the table of contents for the
reliability and service life of the machine and the at-
required information.
tached components.
– The detailed index (table of key words) leads
Read the section Safety measures for your own
you to the sections of the operating and ser-
safety. Follow all the instructions precisely so that
vice manual you are looking for.
you do not endanger yourself or other colleagues
and in order to avoid damage to the machine.
Should you have any questions about the opera-
tion of the machine which are not answered in
these operating instructions, please contact:
Postfach 41 01 64
Telephone +49 2166 607-0
Fax +49 2166 607-209
E-mail service@truetzschler.de
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 9

Introduction
Proper use
The TC type cards are designed exclusively for
carding natural and synthetic fibres.
Use in any other way does not constitute proper, in-
tended use. Never use TC type cards for any other
purposes.
Definition of machine sides

The definition of the machine sides, "left" and
"right", are in line with the definitions for spinning
mill machines in DIN ISO 92. For machines with a
material flow in one direction, the machine sides
are defined looking against the direction of material
flow (arrow).
Example: The operating unit (1) is situated at the
back on the left-hand side of the housing.
1
Type plates
For exact identification of the machine, the card's
type plate (2) of the can be found on the bottom
machine frame behind the third door on the left-
hand side. You require this data for correspon-
dence with Trützschler's customer service in order
to be able to match individual components to the
machine. The type plate contains the following da-
ta:
– Type designation
– Type number
– Commission number 2
– Year of manufacture
– CE mark
10 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Introduction
The type plate on the tuft feeder can be found be-

hind the third card door on the machine frame (1).
The type plate with the electrical connection data is

in the control cabinet on the inside of the left-hand
door (2). This type plate contains the following da-
ta:
– Operating voltage 3 phase AC
– Control voltage 1 phase AC
– Connected load
– Drawing number
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 11

Introduction
Safety measures
Organisational measures Avoiding machine damage

The machine has been built using state-of-the-art If you wish to increase production or the speed of
technology and in accordance with the recognised the main cylinder, you must adjust a series of gaps.
safety regulations. If used in an improper manner, Otherwise considerable damage will be caused to
however, the machine may pose a danger to the the card.
life and limb of the operator or of other persons, or
The following gaps must be adjusted:
machine functions may be impaired.
– between the licker-in unit and the main cylin-
The personnel employed to work on or with the ma-
der
chine must have read and understood these oper-
ating instructions before starting work. This applies – between the main cylinder and doffer
in particular to personnel who are only required to
– between the suction hoods and the main cyl-
work on the machine occasionally, e. g. for mainte-
inder
nance work.
– between the fixed flat and the main cylinder
The owner of the machine has the responsibility to
ensure that the machine is operated safely and – between the revolving flat and the main cylin-
does not present a hazard. He can achieve this der
through the following measures:
If you have any doubts, contact the Trützschler af-
– Ensuring that the operating instructions are ter sales service department for details of how to
available on the machine at all times make adjustments.
– Carrying out regular training courses As the owner of the machine, you are responsible
for the following points:
– Regularly checking that personnel are paying
attention to safety and are aware of the haz- – Use the machine exclusively for applications
ards whilst working described as proper use.
– Observe the operating conditions and materi-
Safety of persons als for the machine described in these operat-
The personnel employed for operation and mainte- ing instructions.
nance must be qualified for their work or must have – Observe the stipulated maintenance intervals.
been instructed by qualified persons.
– Use only original spare parts and process
Qualified persons are those with sufficient knowl- media recommended by Trützschler
edge of the machine as a result of their technical
training and experience. These persons are suffi-
ciently familiar with the relevant local and national
work safety and accident prevention regulations to
be able to assess the safe working condition of the
machine.
– Observe the working instructions for your
place of work.
– Observe the relevant accident prevention reg-
ulations.
– Observe the safety precautions contained in
these operating instructions.
12 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Introduction
Safety instructions
Read the following safety instructions carefully and Maintenance work
observe them at all times. They are given for your As owner of the machine, ensure that only qualified
own safety, for the safety of your colleagues and in personnel are employed to carry out maintenance
order to avoid any damage to the machine and the work on the machine.
attached components.
Install and activate all protective and safety instal-
Before switching on the machine lations correctly after all maintenance work.
As owner of the machine, ensure that only qualified Work on the machine going beyond the operations
personnel are employed to operate the machine. described in the chapter Maintenance may only be
carried out by Trützschler after-sales service per-
Also ensure that the machine is inspected by qual-
sonnel or by persons authorised by Trützschler.
ified personnel to make sure it is in a safe and haz-
ard-free condition before it is switched on for the Do not climb on the machine Only ever walk on lad-
first time, after maintenance work and after any ders, podiums or maintenance scaffolding provided
technical modifications. for this purpose.
As operator of the machine, ensure that you re- Do not start any set-up and maintenance opera-
quest all persons in the danger area of the machine tions until the machine has been disconnected
to leave the area. from the power supply and has come to a standstill.
Secure the master switch with a padlock and put up
Electrical installation and control cabinet a warning sign or use other suitable means to pre-
Ensure that the doors to the control cabinet are vent the machine from being switched on without
kept locked at all times. The key should be kept by authorisation. This applies in particular for machine
a responsible and qualified person, e.g. the plant combinations and machines which cannot be mon-
electrician. itored in all areas at the same time due to their size.
Ensure that no liquids are allowed to penetrate into Carry out modifications to the machine or its com-
the control cabinet or other components. Should ponents only after consultation with Trützschler af-
this nevertheless happen, switch off the machine at ter-sales service. Otherwise major malfunctions
the master switch, lock the switch to prevent unau- may occur causing serious personal injury and ir-
thorised switching on and inform the responsible reparable machine damage.
specialist personnel or the Trützschler after-sales
service department. Further instructions
If this machine is moved to another location or sold
to another company, these operating instructions
must accompany the machine. They are an integral
part of the machine.
Ensure that the floor around the machine is not
soiled with oil or grease after maintenance work.
Otherwise there is a risk of operators or other per-
sons slipping and suffering serious injuries.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 13

Introduction
Safety devices on the machine
3
2
Master switch Door safety mechanisms

The master switch (3) is used to switch the power Except for door (1), all doors are equipped with
supply to the machine ON (I) and to disconnect the electric safety switches. These locked doors can-
machine from the power supply (O). During main- not be opened while the machine is running.
tenance and setting work, you can lock the master
The feeder drive of the tuft feeder is disconnected
switch in the OFF position with a padlock to prevent
from the power supply by means of a safety switch
the machine being accidentally switched on.
if the rear maintenance flap is opened.
Emergency stop button
The card has an emergency stop push-button (2)
next to operating unit. The emergency stop works
on all motorised drives and pneumatic cylinders of
the card, of the tuft feeder and of the coiler or can
changer.
Press in the emergency stop button as far as it will
go in order to stop the machine in an emergency.
The drives are then braked with the maximum de-
celeration and switched off. The machine can only
be switched on again if safety circuit is closed, i.e.
all the doors have been closed and the emergency
stop button has been released.
14 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Introduction
Symbols employed Conventions employed in

The following symbols are employed in these oper- these operating instructions
ating instructions:
Bold type
DANGER All text messages on the operating panel and des-
This symbol draws attention to a potential ignations of key pads are printed in bold type.
hazard for the operator that could result
in serious personal injury or even death. Italics
Cross-references to other sections of the text or
Caution other chapters are printed in italics.
This symbol draws attention to hazards
that could result in machine damage or References between text and pictures
data loss. Numbers shown in the text in brackets, e.g. (1), re-
fer to the numbers of items shown in the figures on
Note the same page.
This symbol draws attention to tips and
points of particular note that make opera- Operating steps
tion of the machine easier for you. Operating steps are marked as follows:
Every safety warning specifies the source of the 1. Open cover flap (1).
hazard, the potential hazard and the measures to
be taken to avoid the danger. 2. Set key switch to 0 and remove key.
3. Unscrew hexagon socket screw (2).
Buttons on the touch screen which you have to
press, are displayed in a special way:
1. Select the basic mask.
2. Start the machine.
Lists
Lists which are not sorted in any particular order
are shown as in the following example:
Pay attention to the following points:
– Remove any soiling.
– Check the tension of the belts.
– Replace any defective parts.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 15

Introduction
16 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
Description
This chapter familiarises you with the functions of In the process, any knots (neps) and residual soil-
the machine, the individual subassemblies and the ing is removed. At the outlet from the card, the fibre
operating elements. web is formed into a sliver which is placed into the
cans by a coiler.
Functions of the machine

The card is fed by the integrated tuft feeder with a
Assembly groups
uniformly compacted tuft mat - the feed sliver. The The main assembly groups of the card are illustrat-
card splits this feed sliver into individual fibres and ed in the following schematic diagram.
positions them parallel to each other.
TC 5-3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 DIRECTFEED DFK tuft feeder 7 MULTI-WEBCLEAN system with fixed flats

2 EASYFEED feed tray 8 Doffer section
3 WEBFEED licker-in unit, 3 rolls 9 Web doffing section
4 MULTI-WEBCLEAN system with fixed flats
5 Cylinder
6 Revolving flat system
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 17

Description
TC 5-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 DIRECTFEED DFK tuft feeder

2 EASYFEED feed tray
3 WEBFEED licker-in unit, 1 roll
5 Main cylinder
6 Revolving flat system
8 Doffer section
9 Web doffing section
18 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
DIRECTFEED tuft feeder

The tuft feeder forms an permanent integral part of 1
the card. The fibre material is drawn in by the open- 2
ing unit with a transport fan and fed to the tuft feed-
er via a feed and distribution pipeline (2). The air
current is discharged through the exhaust pipe (1).
Air separation elements in the upper trunk (3) make
sure that the card is fed uniformly so that a uniform- 3
ly compacted web arrives at feed roll. The material
is clamped on the tray (5) to ensure an optimum
flow of material across the entire width of the trunk.
The opening roll (6) makes sure the material is
opened evenly. The fan (9) ensures that the mate- 4
rial is he material is compacted evenly in the spe-
cially designed lower trunk (7). The web is formed
between air outlet combs (8) and the clamping 5
point of the feed roll. The feed roll of the card trans-
fers the material to the SENSOFEED feed tray.
6
9
7
EASYFEED feed tray

The EASYFEED tray compacts the tuft web and
transports it to the transfer point. The clamping 10
point position can be adjusted to the staple length
of the material fibres.
The web is compacted by the feed roll (12) and the
spring-loaded feed table (10) towards the clamping
point. The feed roll transports the material to the
first opening roll (11) on the downstream WEB-
FEED licker-in unit. 12 11
The tray has a material feed monitoring system

which stops the card when a thick spot is detected.
Faulty material can be removed by using the re-
versing function.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 19

Description
WEBFEED licker-in unit (3 rolls)

The distance between the licker-in unit and the waste is taken on and extracted by the suction
main cylinder (6) is adjustable. On the TC 5 - 3 the hood (1).
unit comprises the opening and cleaning rolls (3, 4
The first roll (3) has needles or a clothing, depend-
and 7) with two carding segments (5 and 8). The
ing on the material to be processed, the following
mote knife (2) can be adjusted depending on the
two rolls have clothings of special steel.
required level of cleaning. When cleaning, any
5 6
4
1
8 7
WEBFEED licker-in unit (1 roll)

The TC 5-1 card has a single opening and cleaning
roll.
20 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
TC-PMS blade adjustment system
The degree of cleaning can be set infinitely variably

using the lever (3) whilst the machine is running.
This adjusts the distance between the knife (1) and
the feed roll (2).
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 21

Description
The MULTI WEBCLEAN system and the revolving flats system

The MULTI WEBCLEAN system makes it possible The infinitely variable setting for the gap between
to use different carding, cleaning, control and cov- the flats system and the main cylinder can be ad-
ering elements flexibly. The elements can be posi- justed using a lever (10). Alternatively, a motorised
tioned in a wide variety of combinations, depending adjustment system which is operated via the touch
on requirements. screen can be integrated.
The material delivered by the licker-in unit is re- The postcarding section (12) can also be equipped
ceived by the precarding section (items 1 to 5) of flexibly with carding, cleaning and covering ele-
the main cylinder and transported into the flats sec- ments. The main cylinder transfers the parallel,
tion. Carding takes place between the cylinder cleaned fibres to the clothing of the doffer roll (14).
clothing and the revolving flat which run in the op-
posite direction.
6 7 8 9
10
5 11
4
12
3
1 13
14
1 Cover section (fixed arrangement) 11 Cleaning element (fixed arrangement)

2 Carding element (flexible arrangement) 12 Post-carding section with flexible element
arrangement
3 Cover section (flexible arrangement)
13 Cover section (fixed arrangement)
4 Cleaning element (flexible arrangement)
14 Doffer roll
5 Cleaning element (fixed arrangement)
6 2-roll flats cleaning device
7 Special toothed belt with cams for engage-
ment of the flats
8 Replaceable aluminium flats
9 Precision flexible bend with six final control-
ling elements
10 Precision flats adjustment system
22 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
Doffer section
The clothing of the doffer roll (1) receives the fibres
from the main cylinder and forms the fibre web. The 3 4 6
5
stripping roll (2) then draws the web from the doffer
roll and transports it via guiding profile (9) to the two
squeezing rolls (4).
2
The cleaning roll (3) is covered with a flexible cloth-
ing and keeps the stripping roll clean.
1
Web doffing section
The web leaves squeezing rolls (4) and is brought
together in the opening of the web guiding bridge in
the WEBSPEED (5) that leads into web trumpet
(7). In the web trumpet, the web is formed into the
card sliver that is drawn out by the two delivery rolls
(6).
9 8 7
Sliver feed
The carded sliver (11) is fed from the card to the
coiler via two deflection rollers (10 and 12).
10 11 12
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 23

Description
Options for sliver delivery

TC-CM manual coiler
The carded sliver (1) is threaded into the sliver
trumpet (3) by two guide rollers (2). The carded
1 2 3
sliver is fed through the coil plate by the delivery
rolls underneath the sliver trumpet. The can (4) ro-
tates during the filling procedure. The offset rotary
movements of the rotary can plate and the coil plate
deposits the carded sliver in a cycloid pattern. 4
The weight of the deposited sliver automatically
lowers the can base. The control unit of the up-
stream card determines the length of the carded
sliver.
You will find further information in the separate op-
erating instructions for the TC-CM coiler.
CCA automatic coiler
With an automatic CCA coiler, the turnstile (6)

pushes the full can out of the can filling position (5).
5
The sliver is severed automatically. At the same
time, an empty can is pushed from the standby po-
sition into the can filling position. The centring unit
makes sure that the empty can is positioned accu-
rately. The filling procedure starts again. This 6
makes operation possible without any interrup-
tions.
You will find further information on the CCA auto-
matic in the separate operating instructions.
24 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
The card's operating unit

The operating unit is used to set and monitor the
machine. All machine data and messages are dis-
played here. The operating unit consists of the
touch screen monitor (1), a combined display and
input panel, and the basic keys (2). The touch
screen monitor displays messages and diagrams
in the same way as a normal monitor. In addition,
inputs can be made and functions selected by
touching the displayed buttons.
If a button cannot currently be used, it is displayed
faded.
Machine ready 1
Power BAE 6
Caution
Possible damage to the touch screen!
Only ever touch the buttons lightly with
your fingers. Do not bang or hit the touch
screen. Do not use any objects such as
pens or tools.
Touch the desired symbol lightly with the tip of your
finger. Depending on the button, a value will be
marked and selected or a function will be called up
and a new window is shown.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 25

Description
Basic mask
Automatic mode
Power BAE 6
1 Top row of buttons / display fields Basic keys (inch, stop, start)
2 Main section The basic keys (4) for machine control have the fol-
lowing functions:
3 Bottom row of buttons / display fields
4 Basic keys for machine control
Operate card in jog mode
The main section of the screen (2) changes, de-
pending on the selected function. It displays texts,
diagrams and in some cases, buttons that can be Stop card
pressed. The top (1) and bottom (3) rows of buttons
and the display fields are valid for all screen-filling
displays. Start card
After a certain amount of time, the touch screen

switches off the background lighting without losing The operating unit also has additional lamps above
any data. Touch the touch screen once to reacti- the keys. The corresponding lamp lights up for as
vate it. After activating, it takes a short while before long as you press a key.
the touch screen can be operated again.
26 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
Power
The green power lamp shows when the operating
unit is switched on and active, even if the screen
saver is active and no display appears on the
screen. Touch the screen quickly to switch the dis-
play back on.
Inching key / inching mode

With each touch of the jog key you increase
the material conveyed. If you press and
hold the jog key, the material transport will
be continuously accelerated. When piecing up of
the sliver, the machine can be accelerated up to a
delivery speed of 100 m/min in jog mode.
The yellow inching mode lamp flashes if currently
only inching mode is available.
Stop key
You can stop the machine with this key.
Start key
If the green start lamp is flashing, you can
press the start key.. Using this key, you
start the machine when it is ready for oper-
ation. In most cases the inching key is also active
when the start lamp is flashing.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 27

Description
Basic mask, top rows
2 3 4 5 6 7
1
Automatic mode
No. Symbol Designation Function or significance

1 Message line Machine status, warnings and fault messages
2 Language selec- Display: Current language as a flag symbol
tion and units of
Press button: Select language of the messages, select units of
measurement
measure for sliver count, length and weight
3 Machine status 1 Display: Current machine status
Press button: Call up log book
Further symbols for machine status 1 are listed on page 29.
4 Machine status 2 Display: Current machine status
Press button: Display manufacturer information
Further symbols for machine status 2 are listed on page 29.
5 Information Display: Machine type
Press button: Display machine and manufacturer information and
the current programme version
6 Lot data Display: Current lot
Press button: Call up lot management, e. g. change lot name and
lot data
7 Date and time Display: Date and time
Press button: Set date and time
28 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
Symbols for machine status Basic buttons

Depending on the status of the machine, one of the Apart from the buttons in the basic mask, a few oth-
following symbols appears both status displays: er basic buttons are frequently used:
Machine status 1:
Button Functions
Symbol Meaning Accept, corresponds to "Enter" on a
The machine runs in automatic computer keyboard
mode Delete the character last entered
Machine not ready
Yes, confirm prompt or switch on
Machine ready for preparation function
No, refuse prompt or switch off
Machine ready function
Increase value, display next value,
Drives starting scroll up
Decrease value, display previous
Drives running value, scroll down
Abort current function
Drives slowing down
(Escape) Abort input without sav-
Material transport ready for starting ing.
Delete selected or displayed data
Machine status 2:
Select the basic mask
Symbol Meaning
Display: Machine is running with no
current faults or warnings
Press button: Display manufacturer
information
Display: A maintenance interval
has elapsed
Press button: Display current warn-
ings and maintenance interval
Display: One of more warnings
have occurred
Press button: Call up window with
current warnings
Display: One of more faults have
occurred
Press button: Call up the first fault
message
Service mode
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 29

Description
Basic mask, main area
1 2 3
12
11 10 9 8 7 6

1 Flats speed
2 Efficiency
3 Lot data Display: Current lot data (sliver count, total draft, delivery speed)
with the preset units of measure
Press button: Change lot data
4 Delivery speed to the can
5 Residual filling quantity of the can
6 Machine balanc- Press button: Calibrate the three regulation and control circuits
ing
7 CV Deviation of the sliver mass (cut length 3 cm)
8 D% Draft deviation
9 Webspeed Press button: Open and close Webspeed
10 Cylinder drive Press button: Switch main cylinder drive on and off
11 Cylinder speed
12 Air pressure in the transfer trunk
30 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
Basic mask, bottom row
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1a Standard level Display: Standard level selected;
Press button: Call up code input
1b Code level 1 Display: Code level 1;
Press button: Change code or exit code level
1c Code level 2 Display: Code level 2;
Press button: Change code or exit code level
2a Settings / pro- Press button: Machine configuration, machine settings, lot data,
gramming communication, service functions
2b Print function Press button: Data transmission via the serial interface or on
CompactFlash card (if available)
(only in certain lists, reports and windows)
3 Diagnostics Press button: Quality / statistics, T-CON, sensors / measured val-
ues, maintenance, shift data
4 Can change Press button: Trigger manual can change
5 Page back Press button: Previous page, if available
6 Page forward Press button: Next page, if available
7 Basic mask Press button: Return to the basic mask
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 31

Description
Selection lists
Selection lists are offered for numeric inputs when

the values exist only in predetermined steps.
When you press a value in the list (1), the value is
displayed above the list (2). Press the "accept" (8)
button to select the value.
4
3
Can diameter
5
2
No. Symbol Function or significance

1 Press the list value to highlight it
2 The current or newly highlighted value is displayed with the preset unit of measure-
ment
3 Designation of the input value
4 Scroll bar for navigation in long lists
5 Close the selection list without changing the current value or making a selection
6 Highlight previous value from the list
7 Highlight next value from the list
8 accept highlighted value
32 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
Numeric inputs
Numeric values can be entered. These are then
automatically checked for validity.
4 5
DFK roll speed limit
3
6
2
No. Symbol Function or significance

1 Numerical keypad for entering numerical values
2a (3.00 … 7.00) Permissible values for this input variable
(3.00 … 7.00)
2b The entered value is outside the admissible range (red): Accept (9) or abort (5) the
input
3 The current value and unit of measurement is displayed as selected
4 Designation of the input value
5 Close the input window without changing the current value or delete the entered fig-
ures and restore the old value
6 Delete the last figure
7 Scroll upwards through several list values
8 Scroll downwards through several list values
9 Check and accept the entered value
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 33

Description
Messages
A message window is superimposed on the current

mask. New inputs can only be made once the win-
dow has been closed. There are four types of mes-
sage, all of which are described in the following.
The structure of fault messages and how to handle
them is described in the chapter Faults.
Symbol Message type Explanation Operator action
Wait This message appears only temporarily and dis- Wait

appears automatically. No inputs can be made
as long as the message is being displayed.
Query Confirm or reject the action to be carried out Yes No

(e. g. delete data).
Caution An important message is displayed and must be Confirm

confirmed by the operator.
Abort The aborting of an action must be confirmed by Confirm

the operator.
Example of a prompt:
Delete data?
Indicator lamp
The multi-coloured indicator lamp is located on the
top of the card housing and indicates the operating
statuses of the machine in the following way:
Signal colour Explanation Operating status
Green, constantly lit Production Machine is producing
Green, flashing Main cylinder speed has been achieved, Machine is ready for production
no fault
Yellow, flashing Can change Can is changed, machine continues

to produce
Yellow, constantly lit General warning during production Machine continues to produce
Red, constantly lit General fault Machine has stopped or switches

off
34 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Description
T-CON – Determining the effective carding gap

Function
On high-performance cards the carding gaps alter
T-CON carding gaps [1/1000"]
during operation as a result of centrifugal force and
thermal expansion. The functional components and 9 7.1 Reference
the cylinder may come into contact if the basic set- 14.04.08 13:58
ting is selected to be too close or in case of extreme Recommenda-
external operating conditions.
16 11.1 12 7.3
– You can use the T-CON to read the current
carding gaps from the touch screen at any
10 5.0 10 4.4
time during production.
– In case of contact between the functional ele-
ments and the cylinder clothing, the
T-CON switches off the card.
T-CON plates
The T-CON plates (1) are used to change the card-

ing gaps safely and absolutely. There are four dif-
ferent T-CON plates which are labelled with the 1
numbers 2, 4, 6 and 8.
The number 6 plate is the default plate for the MTT
cassettes on the doffer side, the number 4 plate is
the default plate for the MRR cassettes on the lick-
er-in side.
Example:
If you replace the number 6 plate with the number
4 plate, you reduced the carding gap by
2/1000".
The fastening screws (3) for the MTT cassettes (2)

have to be slightly unfastened in order to be able to 2
shift the desired T-CON plates (4) between the ex-
tension (5) and the MTT cassette.
You will find more information on the T-CON start-

ing on page 43.
3
5 4
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 35

Description
36 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Operation
Operation
This chapter describes the fundamental operation Switching on the card
of the machine. All settings and modifications going
beyond the normal day-to-day operation of the ma-
DANGER
chine are described in the next chapter, Control
Risk of serious crushing!
settings, starting on page 51.
Wear close-fitting clothing and keep it
The initial start-up with all the necessary basic set- buttoned and tucked in at all times. Staff
tings is carried out by the Trützschler after-sales with long hair must wear a hair net.
service department.
Proceed as follows to prepare the machine for pro-
duction:
Caution
Possible serious damage to the machine! 1. Check and carry out the following items as
After initial start-up of the card or after re- necessary:
placing the flats clothing, the gap be- – the material feed is switched on
tween the flats and the main cylinder is – empty cans are available
set larger to account for the opening up of – all casing doors are closed
the flats clothing. This setting initially
2. If necessary, remove the padlock from the
causes the sliver quality to deteriorate.
master switch.
Check the flats gap after a running-in pe-
riod and set it according to the values 3. Turn on the master switch.
which are entered in the Trützschler set-
4. If the emergency stop button at the top left
ting log.
next to the operating unit has been pressed,
The setting work on the revolving flat are described pull it back into the initial position.
in the chapter Mechanical settings starting on page
5. Switch on master switch (position I).
87.
Daily start-up
Before the daily start of operation, a few prepara- ON
tions and checks have to be carried out. These are
described below. When these have been carried OFF OFF
out, you can begin production.
Preparing the machine surroundings I 0

Make sure to meet all prerequisites so that you can
switch on the machine. The machine is ready as- After a brief delay, the main mask appears on the
sembled, switched off and without material. monitor of the operating unit and the machine is
Make a visual inspection tour of the machine. Look ready for operation.
out for open doors, covers or flaps.
Clean off any dirt, tension loose belts or replace
damaged parts of basic functional elements as de-
scribed in the chapter Maintenance starting on
page 207.
Information on basic settings, the input of lot data
and lot changing can be found in the chapter Con-
trol settings starting on page 51.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 37

Operation
Switching on after an emergency stop

Caution
Possible destruction of modules! It is im-
perative that you check why the emer-
gency stop button has been pressed. Ar-
range for any necessary maintenance
and repair work to be carried out.
Preparing and starting the machine

The computer starts, several routines are displayed
on the monitor before the basic mask appears.
1. Switch on the cylinder drive.
Machine ready
The main cylinder is the started. If you press the
button again, a prompt is displayed asking whether
you want to switch off the main cylinder again.
While the main cylinder is running up to speed, a
number of adjustments are made in order to
achieve the setpoints of the preset values. For ex-
ample, the flats adjustment system and the blade
adjustment system are positioned.
When all the adjustments have been successfully
completed, the following message appears:
Drives starting Power BAE 6
and then:
Material transport ready for starting
In order to convey the material from the delivery
rolls at starting speed:
2. Switch on material transport.
In order to transport the material into the doffer sec-

tion faster (up to 100 m/min) with the machine emp-
ty:
3. Press and hold the jog key.
When you release the jog key, the material trans-

port goes back to starting speed.
38 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Operation
Piecing up
DANGER
When the cover flap is open, long hair or
loose items of clothing may become en-
tangled in the rotating rolls.
buttoned and tucked in at all times. Staff
with long hair must wear a hair net. Do
not touch the rolls with your hand.
4. Remove the conveyed web from in front of the
delivery rolls.
5. Take the half of the web from the lower

squeezing roll and rub it backwards and for-
wards between your hands to form a point.
6. Thread the web into the WEBSPEED funnel.

7. Produce a few metres of sliver.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 39

Operation
8. Place the sliver over the first deflection roller

(1) and guide it over the second deflection
1 2
roller (2) to the can changer.
The machine then switches to Automatic mode -
the WEBSPEED is closed automatically and the
machine accelerates to production speed.
9. Check all the information displayed in the

basic mask and correct using the machine
balancing, if necessary (see page 84). Automatic mode
40 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Operation
Dealing with faults

If a fault occurs, the red "fault" symbol (1) appears
in the upper row of keys and a fault message win- 1
dow is displayed. Proceed as follows in the event of
any faults:
Note
When a fault has occurred, symbol (2) E0141 Sliver break
appears in grey and you cannot acknowl-
edge the fault. When the fault has been
remedied, the symbol changes to red and
the fault can then be acknowledged.
1. With the help of the fault message, localise
and remedy the fault.
2. Acknowledge the fault with
button (2).
3. Start the card again.
2
If a fault message is displayed and a button outside
the fault message window is pressed, the fault
message will disappear. However, the fault has not
yet been acknowledged. In this case, press the
"fault message" button (1) in the top row of buttons
again to display the fault message once more. The
fault can then be remedied and acknowledged in
the fault message window with button (2).
You will find more information starting on page 185.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 41

Operation
Can change
The card is fitted with a manual coiler as standard. Manually on the can changer
If you wish to perform a can change on the auto-
Manually on the coiler matic can changer before the can is completely full,
When the can is full, the speed at which the mate- proceed as follows:
rial is conveyed is reduced to can changing speed
1. Trigger a can change and re-
and the indicator lamp flashes yellow.
set the sliver length to zero.
1. Pull the empty can out of the coiler.
2. Push an empty can into the coiler. The speed at which the material is conveyed is
then reduced to can changing speed. The can
3. Reset the sliver length to zero. changer replaces the can currently being filled with
an empty one.
2. Remove the full can from the unloading posi-
The speed at which the material is conveyed is in- tion via the right-hand ramp.
creased to production speed automatically.
3. Shift the empty can over the left-hand ramp
into the standby position.
Automatically on the can changer
The card is can optionally be fitted with a fully auto- The speed at which the material is conveyed is in-
matic can changer which has its own drive and no creased to production speed automatically.
mechanical link to the card.
The can change is triggered by the coiler based on
the filling level in the can and the sliver length. The
card runs at reduced delivery speed during the can
change. On completion of the can change, the card
runs up to production speed again automatically.
The yellow indicator lamp flashes during the can
change.
1. Remove the full can from the unloading posi-
tion via the right-hand ramp.
2. Shift the empty can over the left-hand ramp
into the standby position.
During a can change, the carded sliver is severed
in the drafting system by an artificially created thin
spot. The changer drive moves the full can out of
the filling position and an empty can into the filling
position.
You can also carry out a manual can change with
the automatic can changer.
42 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Operation
Optimising the carding gap with T-CON
T-CON in normal mode

You will find more information on the T-CON on
page 79.
The T-CON carding gaps [1/1000''] window shows
the set values and current carding gaps in
1/1000'' at five points around the cylinder. Values
shown on a grey background are the settings. Val-
ues with a white background are the current card- 9 7.1 Reference
ing gap dimensions.
14.04.08 14:15
Advice
1. Press the white display fields to show the
changes in the respective carding gap as a
16 11.1 12 7.3
graph (see page 44).
10 5.0 10 4.4
The symbol in the middle of the illustration of the

cylinder can be yellow of green:
– yellow: T-CON is inactive T-CON carding gaps [1/1000"]
– green: T-CON is active 9 7.1 Reference
Advice 14.04.08 14:15
16 11.1 12 7.3
10 5.0 10 4.4
If you wish to compare the absolute temperatures

with each other, you can scroll forwards once in or-
der to compare all reference temperatures with a
Temperature measurement T-CON
grey background (with reference date and time)
with the current measured temperatures with a Reference Temperature
white background in the Temperature measuring
Ambient temp.
T-CON window opposite.
Cylinder
Lateral shield
T-CON reference
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 43

Operation
You can show a more detailed view of the gap

changes by pressing the magnifying glass symbol. 1 2
The x axis of the diagram then shows the last 24
hours (h) instead of a period of days (d).
– Vertical white lines in the diagram mark points
Cylinder / Doffer
at which the card has been switched off at the
master switch, and thus also the end of data
recording. After the card is switched back on,
the data recording starts directly from the
white line.
– The vertical red line (1) shows the limit con-
tact duration in seconds. Contact
Gap
– The purple line (2) shows the setting for this
carding gap. You can change this value using
the button opposite.
– Contacts are shown by the progress of the
4 3
blue curve (3).
– The yellow line (4) shows the current carding
gap.
The smallest carding gap reached for this measur-
ing point with the corresponding date stamp is dis-
played in the white display field on the right. The
value remains in place until the next change to the
set carding gap or until the next referencing pro-
cess.
There is a lower limit for the current carding gap be-
low which the current carding gap values are
shown in yellow (see figure).
You are shown the appropriate warning informing
9 7.1 Reference
you that a certain carding gap is below the permit-
ted limit and the card can no longer be operated re- 14.04.08 14:15
Advice
liably. The permitted limits are set especially for
each of the five measuring points.
16 11.1 12 2.8
To display the warning, press the yellow button with
the exclamation mark. 10 5.0 10 4.4
If the carding element and the cylinder clothing
come into contact, a fault message is displayed
and the card is stopped.
44 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Operation
T-CON flow chart
Machine is cold
Insert T-CON plates and set the carding

gaps with a gauge*)
Reference
Change other settings,
e.g. the speed
Enter the settings in the numerical fields

on the touch screen
Start production
- Material transport stop

- Cylinder stop
Observe the current gaps on the display Make settings by replacing
screen and stop production in case of a the T-CON plates
too narrow carding gap
Set the licker-in and doffer
with a gauge whilst the ma-
chine is cold
Machine is warm Adjust the flat pin settings
with the aid of the PFS
Activate the T-CON gap recommenda-

tion
Select the material to be processed
Can the
recommendations in the yes
blue fields on the touch screen
be applied usefully?
no
Check the sliver quality
Produce
*) Set according to the setting plan in the operating instructions during initial start-up
The individual steps are described in detail on the
following pages.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 45

Operation
T-CON Gap advice

You can improve the carding performance by
changing the carding gap. The carding gap set
whilst the machine is cold is not relevant to the
quality of the sliver, but rather the carding gap un-
der production conditions whilst the machine is T-CON Gap advice
warm. T-CON helps you determine this optimised 9 6.5 Reference
carding gap with a recommended setting on the
touch screen. Advice 14.04.08 14:15
Once you have ensured smooth operation by fol-

lowing the setting instructions in the operating in- 16 10.2 12 6.8
structions, you can start to think about optimisation.
10 5.3 10 4.3
Absolute and relative dimensions
The values in the five grey fields (1) on the touch
screen show the absolute carding gaps in 1/1000",
as set whilst the machine was cold.
The difference between one T-CON plate and the 1
next T-CON plate is 2/1000". The numbers on the
T-CON plates are purely for identification purposes
and are not dimensions.
Colour coding of T-CON plates:
T-CON 2 – red
T-CON 4 – yellow
T-CON 6 – green
T-CON 8 – blue
Caution
Risk of serious damage to the machine!
Change the settings very carefully.
Only optimise the carding gaps with con-
tact measurement switched on.
Do not configure a "T-CON master card"
in order transfer the setting values to oth-
er cards.
46 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Operation
Implementing the gap recommendation

The current temperature status of the card is
shown by the display (1). When the card is warm, 1
the Advice button (2) is displayed.
– Cold machine: Arrow is on the left in the blue
area T-CON Gap advice
– Neither cold nor warm: Double arrow in the 9 6.5 Reference

middle
14.04.08 14:15
Advice
– Warm machine: Arrow is on the right in the
red area (1)
16 10.2 12 6.8
1. Press Advice (2). 10 5.3 10 4.3
The displayed blue fields (3) are empty.

3 4
2. Press the Material button (4).
3. Select the material being used in the dis-
played window: Advice
– 100 % cotton or
Narrower
– 100 % polyester or 9 6.5 Material
Wider
– 100 % viscose
– other
16 10.2 12 6.8
10 5.3 10 4.3
After selecting the material, the page opposite, with

optimisation suggestions, is displayed. The values
in the blue fields (5) are suggestions for changes to
T-CON Gap advice - 100% cotton -
the carding gap at the respective point:
Narrower
-1 9 6.5 Material
– Positive values stand for an increase of the Wider
carding gap.
– Negative values stand for a reduction of the
carding gap. 0 16 10.2 -2 12 6.8
0 10 5.3 0 10 4.3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 47

Operation
4. Stop the material transport and cylinder.

5. Set to the recommended values by replacing
the T-CON plates.
6. Set the licker-in and doffer as recommended
with a gauge whilst the machine is cold (see
information starting on page 110).
7. Adjust the carding gap of the flats pins using
the TC-PFS flats adjustment system (see
page 97).
8. Start up the material transport again.
Checking the settings

1. Press the Advice button.
The recommendations for optimisation of the card-
T-CON Gap advice - 100% cotton -
ing gap in the blue fields (1) should all be at "0".
Narrower
0 8 5.3 Material
Wider
0 16 9.9 0 10 4.6
0 10 5.1 0 10 4.2
48 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Operation
Switching off the card

Before carrying out cleaning work or changing set- 7. Leave the main cylinder motor running for
tings, the card must be completely emptied of all approximately 10 minutes so that the flats can
material and then switched off. be cleaned by the cleaning rolls, then:
If you also wish to empty the trunk of the DFK tuft 8. Switch off the main cylinder
feeder, you must also switch off the material feed to drive.
the tuft feeder.
Caution Note
Risk of damage to the clothings and other A safety check question is displayed to
components! prevent the main cylinder being acciden-
If the card is to be switched off for several tally switched off.
days, ensure that all material has been The main cylinder drive is switched off and the
removed from the card before switching green bar of the "cylinder drive" button disappears.
off. Moisture can cause any material left
in the machine to stick or form lumps. 9. Switch off master switch (position O).
This can then cause serious damage to 10. Before carrying out cleaning or maintenance
the machine when the card is switched work, lock the master switch in the off position
on again. with a padlock to prevent unauthorised
Switch off the material feed to the DFK tuft feeder restarting.
as follows:
1. Select Settings / program-

ming.
2. Select Service functions.
3. Select DFK active.
4. Switching off the DFK.
5. Leave the material transport running until

there is no more material appears between
the delivery rolls.
The material transport either switches off automat-
ically, or you switch off the material transport by
pressing a button:
6. Switch off the material trans-

port.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 49

Operation
50 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Control settings
This chapter describes all settings for controlling Basic settings
the card.
The basic settings include functions which you can
Caution call up using buttons in the basic mask:
Risk of damage to assembly groups and – Code levels,
production faults!
Incorrect settings can interfere with the – Language and units,
production process and lead to extensive – Lot management and
repairs and settings.
Settings must be changed by properly – Date and time
trained, specialist personnel only.
The order of the settings is determined by the order
of the menu commands in the touch screen menus.
In the chapter Description you will find basic infor-
mation on the touch screen and how to operate it.
If you are looking for a particular function, refer to
the Index at the end of these operating instructions.
The starting point for each of the sequences of but-
tons described is the basic mask. The functions are
displayed as symbols on the buttons. Menus, menu
commands and window names on the touch
screen are shown in bold type.
Example:
1. Select the basic mask.
2. Select Diagnostics / Statis-

tic.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 51

Control settings
Code levels
The machine settings are protected by different Changing the code
code levels. Basic settings can only be changed if In code level 2, you can change codes 1 and 2. In
you switch the machine to code level 1 or 2. You ei- code level 1 you can only change code 1.
ther enter the respective code when prompted or
you switch the code level as described in the fol- 1. Select code from code level 1
lowing. or 2.
Note 2. Enter code 1 or 2 again.

This symbol appears if the incorrect code
has been entered. 3. Accept, enter new code once
more.
Selecting standard level
At standard level you can only view most of the val- 4. Accept.
ues and carry out "normal" operation of the ma-
chine. The machine is locked to prevent changes to
settings. Resetting codes to default values
If a code has been changed unintentionally or is not
1. Select code from code level 1
known, you can reset both codes to the default val-
or 2.
ues. The default value for code level 1 is "1234".
2. Activate standard level. The default value for code level 2 is "12345".
If the machine is already in the standard level, be-
gin with step 3.
Code level 1
1. Select code input from code
If you want to change values, e. g. the lot data, you
level 1 or 2.
must first enable code level 1 using a 4 digit code.
1. Enter four-digit code in stan-

dard level. 2. Activate standard level.
2. Accept.
3. Select standard level code in-
put and enter reset code
753951.
Code level 2
If you want to make basic machine settings, you 4. Confirm query Reset codes.
must first enable code level 2 using the five digit
code. 5. Accept.
1. Enter five-digit code in stan-
dard level.
2. Accept.
52 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Language and units

You can select the basic settings for messages and Selecting units of measurement
display values on the touch screen here. Chose between metric and imperial units of mea-
surement: Metres (m) und kilometres (km) or yards
Selecting the language (yd) und miles (mi) for lengths. Information on
There are different languages available for the speed is issued accordingly in m/min or y/min.
messages on the operating unit: Select one of the Weights are shown in pounds (lbs) or kilograms
available languages as follows: (kg).
1. Select Language selection 1. Select Language selection

and units. and units.
2. Select the language. 2. Select the units for length and
weights.
3. Accept. 3. Accept.
Selecting the unit for the sliver count

The units for sliver count and sliver weight are:
ktex, Nm, Ne or gr/yd.
1. Select Language selection

and units.
2. Select the unit for the sliver
count.
3. Accept.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 53

Control settings
Log book
1 2 3 4 5
Log book 6
1 Date Calling up the log book

2 Time Call up the log book from the top row on the basic
screen using the "Machine status 1" button:
3 Description of the event
4. Select Log book.
4 Press button: Update the log book
5 Press button: Switch between
- show fault messages only or 5. Show fault messages only.
- show all events
6 Warning number, fault number, frequency of 6. Show all events.
event
7 Scroll bar for navigating in the log book 7. Update the log book.
Machine operation is recorded in the log book.

These are events which the machine reports and
all operator interventions. Changes to settings are
also partly recorded in the log book.
You can either list all events or fault messages only.
The log book is not automatically updated whilst
being displayed.
54 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Information
This screen gives information about the machine.
The programme version and its release date are
displayed below the machine designation.
Information
The time and quantity produced in automatic mode
are shown after the operating hours counter (time
connected to the mains). The final thing you see is
the current temperature in the control cabinet.
The following page contains further functions for
the Trützschler after-sales service department.
1. Select Information.
2. Scroll to the page Trützschler

Service.
This information is for servicing work which is car-

ried out by Trützschler after sales service staff.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 55

Control settings
Lot management
Lot management
4
3
2 7
The data which leads to optimum production data 1 Active lot (yellow), contains the current lot
and quality data for a particular type of material are data of the machine (working memory)
stored in a lot. The lot data concerns the mechani-
A date next to a lot symbol indicates that the
cal and electrical machine settings and the func-
lot contains data. The date itself shows the
tions of the machine control system (software). You
day of the last change to this lot data.
an only change lot data in an active lot.
2 Free lot ---
If lot data becomes invalid (e.g. due to a program
change), it is marked in magenta and can now only 3 Selected lot (white) for following options:
be deleted. Copy (4), paste (5), delete (6), activate or
change lot (7)
If you press the selected lot (3) once more,
the data from this lot will be displayed.
4 Copy selected lot to intermediate memory
5 Fill or overwrite selected lot slot with the data
from the intermediate memory
6 Delete the date and data of the selected lot
7 Lot change Activate selected lot
56 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Displaying a lot Creating a new lot

Call up the lot data from the top row of the basic A new lot can be created (copied) using an old lot
screen using the "Lot data" button. You can display as the basis; there are no empty lots. Select a suit-
the data from any lot. able lot as the template:
1. Select Lot data from the title 1. Select Lot data.

bar.
2. Select a lot. 2. Select a lot as a template.
3. Display an overview of lot da- 3. Copy the lot data.

ta.
4. Select a target for the new lot.
This is where you find the setpoints for the active lot
as well as the set limiting values which have been
defined for this lot. 5. Paste the lot data to the se-
lected lot memory.
If you wish to change the lot data, you must first se-
lect the lot as the active lot (lot change). You can 6. Confirm the prompt Overwrite
then change the data. data? as necessary.
Selecting a lot 7. Accept.

If you wish to use an existing lot, proceed as fol-
lows:
Deleting a lot
1. Select Lot data. Use this function to delete the marked lot and its lot
data. The active lot cannot be deleted.
2. Highlight the desired lot.
1. Select Lot data.
3. Accept.
2. Select the lot to be deleted.
The name of the selected lot is displayed along 3. Delete the lot.
with the coloured lot symbol in the top right of the
basic mask. 4. Confirm the prompt Delete da-
ta?.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 57

Control settings
Programme change / programme version

Existing lot data which is not compatible with the
new software may become invalid when updating
the control software. Display and make a note of all
important data in the lot data before a programme
change. If you have a connection to an external PC
or printer, you can output the data by pressing the
printer symbol on the touch screen.
You must generate this lot data again and also re-
balance the machine.
Date and time

The date and time affects functions such as the
"log book" or "shift data". If you are using external
shift management, you cannot change the date
and time here.
1. Select Date and time.
2. Use the arrow keys to set the

day, month and year and
hours, minutes and seconds.
3. Accept.
58 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Machine configuration
In machine configuration you communicate to the Servo drive type depositing system
system which machine components and which Depending on the type of drive used on your coiling
equipment options are available in your card instal- system, you have to communicate the appropriate
lation. part number for the drive to the system.
Cylinder drive Note

Select whether the cylinder drive is fitted with a fre- You will find the appropriate part number
quency converter (FC) or select the appropriate on the drive side of the servo drive under-
mains frequency for your local mains power supply. neath the protective hood on the coiler.
1. Select Settings / program- 1. Select Settings / program-

ming. ming.
2. Select Machine configura- 2. Select Machine configura-

tion. tion.
3. Press Cylinder drive and se- 3. Press Deposit servo drive

lect the appropriate value. type and select the appropri-
ate part number.
Sliver deposit system

Licker-in
Communicate to the system which sliver deposit
system is installed. This setting is displayed auto- Communicate to the system whether the card is fit-
matically when starting up for the first time. ted with a single licker-in roll (TC 5-1) or three lick-
er-in rolls (TC 5-3).
ming. 1. Select Settings / program-
ming.
2. Select Machine configura-
tion. 2. Select Machine configura-
tion.
3. Press Sliver deposit system
and select the installed system 3. Press Licker-in and select the
from the list. appropriate number.
Can diameter
Select the appropriate can diameter for the in-
stalled coiler or can changer.

ming.
tion.
3. Press Can diameter and se-
lect the appropriate value.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 59

Control settings
Web doffer drives Filter box

Communicate to the system whether the web Communicate to the system whether or not the
doffer is fitted with one drive (TC 5-1) or two drives card is fitted with a separate TC-FB filter box.
(option for the TC 5-3).
1. Select Settings / programming.
ming.
2. Select Machine configuration.
tion.
3. Scroll to Filter box.
3. Press Web doffer drive and
select the appropriate number.
4. Select Filter box.
T-CON
5. Select if a separate filter box is
Communicate to the system whether or not you installed.
wish to activate the T-CON carding gap optimisa-
tion. Select if a separate filter box is
not installed.
ming.
Separate flat strips suction
Communicate to the system whether or not sepa-
tion.
rate TC-FS flat strips suction is installed.
3. Scroll to T-CON.
ming.
4. Select T-CON.
tion.
5. Select to activate T-CON.
3. Scroll to Separate flat strips
Select to deactivate T-CON. suction.
4. Select Separate flat strips
suction.
5. Select if separate flat strips
suction is available.
Select if separate flat strips
suction is not available.
60 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Metal detector Lap feeding

Communicate to the system whether or not a metal Communicate to the system whether or not the
detector is installed. card is fitted with a separate lap feeder.

ming. ming.
2. Select Machine configura- 2. Select Machine configura-
tion. tion.
3. Scroll to Metal detector. 3. Scroll to Lap feeding.
4. Select Metal detector. 4. Select Lap feeding.
5. Select if a metal detector is 5. Select if a lap feeder is in-

available. stalled.
Select if no lap feeder is in-
Select if no metal detector is
stalled.
available.
DFK slide valve

Communicate to the system whether or not the
DFK tuft feeder is fitted with a slide valve.

ming.
tion.
3. Scroll to DFK slide valve.
4. Select DFK slide valve.
5. Select if a slide valve is in-

stalled.
Select if a slide valve is not in-
stalled.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 61

Control settings
Machine settings
In machine settings you set speeds, distances, in- Webspeed OPEN
tervals and other parameters for the forming of sliv- You can open the WEBSPEED sliver former during
ers. production in order to remove web samples or to in-
spect the web visually.
Pulley diameter for
With this setting, you determine at which speed the
You must set which belt pulleys are fitted to the machine should operate when you open the WEB-
drive groups of the card in the machine control sys- SPEED sliver former.
tem. This is the only way in which the system can
correctly display and check speeds. The diameter 1. Select Settings / program-
is marked on each pulley. ming.
1. Select Settings / program- 2. Select Machine settings.

ming.
2. Select Machine settings. 3. Select Webspeed OPEN and
enter a speed.
4. Accept.
A schematic top view plan of all belt pulleys is then
displayed. The replaceable belt pulleys are num-
bered. You can select the appropriate pulley diam-
eter for each numbered belt pulley from the list. Blade cleaning
With this setting you set after how many minutes
3. Press the corresponding but-
the squeezing roll blades should be raised and
ton and select the appropriate
blown through in order to remove material depos-
pulley diameter from the list.
its.
DFK roll speed limit 1. Select Settings / program-

ming.
It is here where you set the minimum speed of the
opening roll of the DFK tuft feeder. If the speed 2. Select Machine settings.
drops below this value, the card switches off and a
fault message is issued.
3. Select Blade cleaning and
1. Select Settings / program- enter a period of time.
ming.
4. Accept.
2. Select Machine settings.
3. Scroll to DFK roll speed limit.
4. Select DFK roll speed limit

and enter a speed.
5. Accept.
62 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Can monitoring Lower can changing speed for

With this setting you can define whether a warning This is where you enter the value by which the pro-
message is issued in the following situations: duction speed is reduced for a can change. You
can enter values from 0 ... 30 m/min.
– if there is no empty can available in the can
changer or 1. Select Settings / program-
– if the filled can has not been removed from ming.
the can changer. 2. Select Machine settings.
Define which length of sliver contained in the cur-
rent can should cause the indicator lamps to flash
3. Scroll to Lower can changing
and a warning to appear on the screen. When mak-
speed for.
ing this setting pay attention to the intended deliv-
ery speed. 4. Select Lower can changing
speed for and enter value.
ming. 5. Accept.
Web thickness tolerance

3. Select Can monitoring and
enter the sliver length. The tuft web is compressed in the EASYFEED feed
tray using the feed table. With this setting you de-
4. Accept. termine how far the spring element is allowed to be
pushed apart by the material beyond the calibration
value. The material transport is switched off once
the sum of the calibration value and tolerance val-
Sliver cutter ue is reached.
It is here where you define how much time elapses
before the sliver separator is activated after the 1. Select Settings / program-
turnstile has started to turn. ming.
1. Select Settings / program- 2. Select Machine settings.

ming.
2. Select Machine settings. 3. Scroll to Web thickness toler-
ance.
3. Scroll to Sliver cutter. 4. Select Web thickness toler-

ance and enter the limit value
for the excursion.
4. Select Sliver cutter and enter
an interval in seconds. 5. Accept.
5. Accept.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 63

Control settings
Suction pressure too low - cylinder off Quality error acknowledge only with
You can set whether the cylinder is switched off be- code
low a certain level of suction pressure to prevent With this setting you can determine whether users
the card from overheating. of the system have to enter a code in order to ac-
knowledge any quality faults detected.
Caution
Risk of blockage in the suction hoods! 1. Select Settings / program-
If the suction pressure is too low, the ma- ming.
terial is not extracted at a quick enough
rate; as a result the machine overheats.

3. Scroll to Quality error ac-
ming.
knowledge only with code.
4. Select Quality error ac-
knowledge only with code.
3. Scroll to Suction pressure
5. Select to only allow acknowl-
too low - cylinder off.
edgement after input of a
4. Select Suction pressure too code.
low - cylinder off. Select to allow acknowledge-
5. Select to switch the cylinder off ment without input of a code.
if the suction pressure is too
low. 6. Accept.
Select if the cylinder should

not be switched off when the
suction pressure is too low. Thick spots monitoring
This is where you can activate thick spots monitor-
6. Accept.
ing.

ming.
3. Scroll to Thick spots moni-

toring.
4. Select Thick spots monitor-
ing.
5. Activate thick spots monitor-
ing.
Deactivate thick spots moni-
toring.
6. Accept.
64 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Lot data
The lot data encompasses a number of production DFK target pressure
parameters for the card which you can combine to Using this setting, you can set the pressure in the
suit the material. On delivery of the card, a default lower trunk of the DIRECTFEED DFK tuft feeder.
data set which serves as the basis for further lot
data is already stored in the system. 1. Select Settings / program-
You always establish the lot data in a series of trials ming.
depending on the machine configuration and the 2. Select Lot data.
material to be processed. Once you have achieved
a satisfying result, you can save the parameters
you have established as a lot under an instantly 3. Select DFK target pressure
recognisable name and call them up as required. and enter value.
4. Accept.
Sliver count
This setting is used to specify the sliver count in the
output measuring funnel.
Draft
1. Select Settings / program- Using this setting, you set the draft which you re-
ming. quire to achieve the necessary sliver count.
2. Select Lot data. 1. Select Settings / program-
ming.
3. Select Sliver count and enter 2. Select Lot data.
value.
4. Accept. 3. Select Draft and enter value.
4. Accept.
Delivery speed
You can set the delivery speed of the belt to the
coiler or the can changer as follows:

ming.
2. Select Lot data.
3. Select Delivery speed and

enter value.
4. Accept.
Note
On machines with the transverse web de-
livery option, the delivery speed must not
exceed 280 m/min.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 65

Control settings
Minimum draft V4 Change wheel MW (draft V4)

This menu item only appears if the delivery unit is This menu item only appears if the delivery unit is
fitted with two motors. fitted with one motor.
When piecing up the sliver the machine is operated
Note
at a low delivery speed. Draft V4 must therefore
On machines with just one motor on the
also be reduced so that the sliver does not tear.
delivery unit, you set draft V4 by chang-
With this setting you define the minimum V4 draft ing the drive wheel (see page 105).
which should be effected between the squeezing
You must then enter on the system the number of
rolls and the delivery rolls in order to piece up the
teeth on the drive wheel in use.
sliver at slow speed.
On machines with two motors on the delivery unit, 1. Select Settings / program-
set draft V4 as follows: ming.
1. Select Settings / program- 2. Select Lot data.

ming.
2. Select Lot data. 3. Select Change wheel MW
(draft V4) and select the ap-
propriate number of teeth.
3. Select Minimum draft V4 and
4. Accept.
enter value.
4. Accept.
Card - coiler tension
This is where you set the draft between the card's
Maximum draft V4 delivery rolls and the coiler. The ideal draft is
This menu item only appears if the delivery unit is achieved when the sliver hangs in the middle of the
fitted with two motors. light barrier bar. The value serves as the setpoint
for long-term loop control by the light barrier bar.
With this setting you define the maximum V4 draft
which should be effected between the squeezing 1. Select Settings / program-
rolls and the delivers rolls at maximum delivery ming.
speed.
2. Select Lot data.
The optimum draft has been achieved if the triangle
of web brought together in the funnel does not flut-
ter and does not tear. 3. Scroll to Card coiler tension.

ming. 4. Select Card coiler tension
and enter value.
2. Select Lot data.
5. Accept.
3. Select Maximum draft V4 and

enter value.
4. Accept.
66 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Can filling quantity Slow speed

This is where you determine how many metres of When faults occur - e.g. in the blow room - the
sliver should be delivered into the can before a can transport speed is reduced to slow speed for a cer-
change is triggered. The length of the sliver de- tain period before being switched off completely. If
pends on the material and the size of the can. the fault is remedied and acknowledged within this
period, the material transport returns to production
1. Select Settings / program- speed again. With this setting you define the speed
ming. of slow speed.
2. Select Lot data. 1. Select Settings / program-
ming.
3. Scroll to Can filling. 2. Select Lot data.
4. Select Can filling and enter 3. Scroll to Slow speed.

the sliver length.
5. Accept. 4. Select Slow speed and enter
a speed.
5. Accept.
Starting speed
This is where you define at which speed the mate-
rial is to be delivered when piecing up.

ming.
2. Select Lot data.
3. Scroll to Starting speed.
4. Select Starting speed and en-

ter value.
5. Accept.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 67

Control settings
Can changing speed Flats speed

When a can change is due, the delivery speed of With this setting you define the speed of the revolv-
the card is reduced so that the can change can be ing flat.
carried out.
The can changing speed is determined by the sliv- 1. Select Settings / program-
er break which depends on the material. The sliver ming.
must not be allowed to reach the floor during the 2. Select Lot data.
can changing process.
Establish the optimum sliver break for your material
3. Scroll to Flats speed.
and set how high the delivery speed should be dur-
ing the can changing process.
4. Select Flats speed and enter
speed.
ming.
5. Accept.
2. Select Lot data.
3. Scroll to Can changing

Setting limit values
speed.
Using both limiting values for the CV value and for
4. Select Can changing speed the maximum permitted number of thick spots and
and enter a speed. the sliver count, you determine the parameters for
sliver monitoring (see section starting on page 84).
5. Accept.
CV value limit
With this setting you determine the maximum CV
Rotary can plate drive value. The machine checks whether the limit value
This is where you determine whether the sliver is to is being met at frequent intervals and of the limit
be placed in the can loosely or compact. Make set- value is exceeded, the machine is shut down and a
tings which are suited the material being produced. fault message is issued.
ming. ming.
2. Select Lot data. 2. Select Limits.
3. Scroll to Rotary can plate 3. Select CV value limit and en-

drive. ter a percentage.
4. Select Rotary can plate drive 4. Accept.
and enter a percentage.
5. Accept.
68 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Thick spot limit value TC-NCT limit values

Enter here how many thick spots per kilometre
should be permitted. Notes
Further information can be found in the
1. Select Settings / program- operating instructions for the NEPCON-
ming. TROL TC-NCT nep sensor.
The nep sensor is not available for the
2. Select Limits. synthetic fibres card.
If your card is equipped with an external video
3. Select Thick spot limit value monitor for displaying camera pictures from the
and enter the maximum value TC-NCT nep sensor and you have activated it us-
per unit of length. ing the menu sequence Settings / programming
4. Accept. > Communication > NCT monitoring, you can
enter the limit values for the TC-NCT at this point
(see also page 70).
T-CON monitoring 1. Select Settings / program-

ming.
To safeguard the machine you must switch on the
automatic contact monitoring. However, for trouble 2. Select Limits.
shooting purposes or for test runs you can also
switch off contact monitoring in order to deactivate
the automatic switch-off function. 3. Scroll to Limit values NCT.
Caution 4. Select the desired limit value

Risk of serious damage to the machine! and enter value.
If you switch off T-CON monitoring, the
automatic switch-off function after a con- 5. Accept.
tact has been made between the cylinder
and the carding elements is also dis-
abled.

ming.
2. Select Limits.
3. Select T-CON monitoring.
4. Switch on T-CON monitoring.

Switch off T-CON monitoring.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 69

Control settings
Communication
Using this menu item you select via which interfac- NCT monitoring
es the machine can communicate with other sys-
tems. Notes
Activating communication interfaces operating instructions for the NEPCON-
TROL TC-NCT nep sensor.
The card has the following data interfaces:
– The TST ("Trützschler Service Tool") gives Setting the margin
the Trützschler after sales service staff insight You use these menu items to set the left and right-
into all system areas and supports diagnostics hand margins for NCT measurements.
and trouble-shooting.
– The individual machines of an installation are 1. Select Settings / program-
controlled via the TKN (Trützschler Kommuni- ming.
kationsnetzwerk (Trützschler communication 2. Select Communication.
network)) using a central computer.
1. Select Settings / program- 3. Scroll to NCT Parameter.

ming.
2. Select Communication. 4. Press Left-hand margin or
3. Activate TST; a green field ap- Right-hand margin and enter

pears above. a value.
On connection the globe at the 5. Accept.
top right of the message line is
marked in colour.
Deactivate TST; the green Setting the threshold value
field is extinguished. You use these menu items to set the threshold val-
ues for thick spots and thin spots.
– Repeat the steps described above for the
TKN if required for the given system environ-
ming.
ment.
– Enter the network address for the TKN net- 2. Select Communication.
work.
When the connection has been established, the 3. Scroll to NCT Parameter.
globe or the PC symbol at the top of the message
line is displayed in colour.
4. Press Thick spot threshold
or
Press Thin spot threshold
and enter a value.
5. Accept.
70 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
NCT parameter set

You can select a suitable parameter set for the ma-
terial to be processed.

ming.
2. Select Communication.
3. Scroll to NCT Parameter.
4. Press NCT Parameter set

and select a suitable parame-
ter set.
5. Accept.
NCT internal fault

The number of internal nep sensor faults which
have occurred is shown here.

ming.
2. Select Communication.
3. Scroll to NCT Parameter.
4. NCT internal fault - Read

number of internal faults.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 71

Control settings
Service functions
Unlike the "Service" mode which can only be called Suction pressure monitoring
up with the key-switch in the control cabinet, func- If the suction pressure exceeds a certain value, the
tions are included here which can be called up di- machine switches off. You can switch the monitor-
rectly. ing function on or off. However, the system control-
ler switches the monitoring function back on after a
DFK active predetermined period.
If you want to remove material from the card - e.g.
for a material change - you can switch off the DFK
ming.
tuft feeder separately. In this way material is no lon-
ger fed to the card and all material which is inside 2. Select Service functions.
the card is ejected at the front.
1. Select Settings / program- 3. Select Suction pressure

ming. monitoring.
2. Select Service functions. 4. Switch on suction monitoring.
Switch the suction monitoring

3. Select DFK active.
function off.
4. Switch on the DFK.

Metal detector
Switch off the DFK. If you have switched on the metal detector, the ma-
chines switches off as soon as the feed roll re-
ceives a metal particle. When reversing it is possi-
Funnel control ble that there is temporarily no material available;
at this stage it is possible that the metal detector
If you have switched on Funnel control, the ma-
will cut in and switch off the machine.
chine switches off as soon as the sliver count devi-
ates considerably from the setpoint value. For this You can switch the metal detector off when revers-
purpose the sliver count is measured in the output ing. However, the system controller switches the
measuring funnel. monitoring function back on after a predetermined
period.
ming. 1. Select Settings / program-
ming.
3. Select Funnel control.

3. Select Metal detector.
4. Switch on funnel control.

4. Switch the metal detector on.
Switch off funnel control.
Switch the metal detector off.
72 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Test door locking

You can use this function to check whether all elec-
trical door locking systems are working properly.

ming.
3. Select Test door locking.
4. Lock door.
Release door.
NCT monitor on
Inform the system whether or not an external video
monitor is connected to the card to show the cam-
era pictures from the TC-NCT NEPCONTROL nep
sensor.
Note
This setting can only be made if the NCT
system has been activated. Make sure
that the NCT monitor is deactivated if you
have not connected an external video
monitor. Otherwise the nep sensor's
computing time will lengthen consider-
ably.

ming.
3. Select NCT monitor on.
4. Switch NCT monitor on.
Switch the NCT monitor off.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 73

Control settings
Diagnostics / Statistic
It is here where you find a summary of quality relat-
ed card data. Current values, limiting values and
progress over time are shown.
Draft deviation 4
3
11.3 %
2 6
CV values
3.30 %
1.74 %
7
9 8
Draft deviation and CV values 7 Display: Limit CV% value at CCA funnel
Press button: Change CV% limit
If the machine stops for a long time, the log is inter-
rupted. This is shown in the diagram by a white, 8 Current CV% value at CCA funnel
vertical line (4).
9 Current CV-In value at card feed unit (ICFD)
1 Progress of values, CV% and CVin
Call up the diagrams as follows:
2 Current draft deviation
1. Select Quality / Statistic.
3 Progress of draft deviation, D%
4 Vertical, white line: Interruption, new log
2. Scroll to the desired quality di-
5 Events bar: agram.
white - regulation OFF
cyan / light blue - balancing in progress 3. If desired, alter limiting value.
red - draft deviation too large
6 Display: Draft deviation limit value
Press button: (no function stored)
74 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Quality diagrams
The following colours are used in the diagrams:

Lines
red, horizontal: Limiting value
yellow, horizontal: 1. Measured value
green, horizontal: 2. Measured value
green dotted, horizontal : Auxiliary line
green, vertical: Auxiliary line
white, vertical: Interruption, break in log, re-start of
log
Lower event bar
cyan / light blue, horizontal: Regulation OFF
white, horizontal: Balancing in progress
red, horizontal: Draft deviation too large
Spectrogram
Spectrogram
3
2
5.00 ktex
330 m/min
4
1
5
0.51 m
The spectrogram shows the extent of periodic sliv- Call up the diagram as follows:
er weight deviations in the form of a bar chart
above the wave length. 1. Select Quality / Statistic.
Clear deviations from the curve are referred to as

"chimneys" and imply a fault on one of the rotating 2. Scroll to page Spectrogram.
parts within the machine.
1 Currently selected wave length
2 Chimney
3 Sliver weight
4 Delivery speed
5 Navigation buttons, right-left
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 75

Control settings
Thick spots
Thick spots
0.9 / km
1
5 4
This analysis points out the thick spots on the sliv- Call up the diagram as follows:
er.
1 Current measured value of thick spots per
kilometre
2. Scroll to page Thick spots.
2 Progress of measured values for the number
of thick spots per kilometre of sliver.
3. If desired, alter limiting value.
3 Graphic display of the limit value (red line)
4 Limiting value for thick spots per kilometre
4. Scroll further to the thick spots
5 Reset measured values to 0 counter.
When the limiting value is exceeded the display

field (1) is highlighted red.
76 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Thick spots counter
Thick spots
34 16 40 34 39 18
89 29 68 116 74 62
195 77 133 247 177 158
100 100 100 100 100 69
The table columns are shifted left each time 100 km

of sliver length is measured. T becomes T-1, T-2
becomes T-3 etc. Column "T" on the right-hand
side shows the current count. The identified thick
spots are divided up into three categories accord-
ing to size and totalled up within the respective cat-
egory. The 15 % category contains the 20 % and
25 % categories.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 77

Control settings
NCT data
If the TC-NCT is activated, the following data from Web statistics
NCT measurements is shown in this evaluation: The NCT web statistics diagram shows the thick-
– Diagram for Nep particle statistics ness and homogeneity of the material.
– Measured values for Nep particle statistics Call up the diagram as follows:
– Diagram for NCT web statistics 1. Select Quality / Statistic.

– Measured values for NCT web statistics
2. Scroll to the NCT web statis-
Note tics page.
operating instructions for the NEPCON-
Exact values are shown on the NCT data page.
TROL TC-NCT nep sensor.
3. Select NCT data.
Particle statistics
The Nep particle statistics diagram shows the
quantity of neps, seed coats and trash in the mate-
rial.
Call up the diagram as follows:
2. Scroll to the Nep particle sta-

tistics page.
Exact values are shown on the NCT data page.
3. Select NCT data.
78 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
T-CON
Putting T-CON into operation

In order to put T-CON carding gap optimisation into
operation, you have to activate the T-CON (see
page 60) and switch on T-CON monitoring (see
page 69).
1. Allow the machine to cool to ambient temper-
ature.
1 2
2. Select Quality / Statistic -> T-CON and scroll
to the Adjusted minimal carding gap [1/
1000''] window.
Adjusted minimal carding gap [1/1000'']
Note Reference
0
You cannot make any changes to the
carding gap until the machine is cold: Recommenda-
Cold machine: Arrow points to the blue
area on the left (1) 0 0
Warm machine: Arrow points to the red
area on the right (2)
0 0
The Reference is only activated if the "Machine is
cold" temperature display is shown. This prevents
changes being made to the carding gap whilst the
machine is warm as they would be too low when
the machine is cold.
3. Insert T-CON plates and use a gauge to set
the carding gaps as per the setting recom-
mendations which start on page 110.
4. Press the Reference button.
Caution Adjusted minimal carding gap [1/1000'']

Risk of incorrect measured values!
9 9 Reference
Set the carding gaps immediately before
referencing. The carding gaps will other-
Advice
wise be calculated incorrectly.
Once referencing has been completed the fields for 16 16 12 12
the setting values are displayed with a yellow back-
ground and do not contain any values. 10 10 10 10
5. Press each of the five yellow buttons one by
one and enter the set carding gap for each
one.
6. Start production.
You will find more information on the T-CON start-
ing on page 43.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 79

Control settings
Sensors / measured values
Displaying current measured values Displaying current drafts

This is where you find an overview of all important If you scroll on from the Speeds window, you see
gap measurements for the sliver count currently in the Drafts window an overview of Delivery
being produced. speed, Production, Draft, Draft V4 and Card
coiler tension.
tic. 1. Select Diagnostics / Statis-
tic.
2. Select Sensors / Measured
values. 2. Scroll to Drafts.
Speeds
The left-hand column lists the setpoint values (grey
After calling up Sensors / Measured values you background). The right-hand column lists the actu-
see the current speeds of the motors and rolls. The al values (white background).
speeds of shafts which are driven by belts are cal-
culated from the transmission.
Sensors / Measured values
1. Select Diagnostics / Statis- This window shows the setpoint values and actual
tic. values for the web thicknesses of the control cir-
2. Scroll further to the other cuits ICFD and CCD and the current sliver fineness
speed displays. (see also the section Machine balancing starting
on page 84).

tic.
2. Scroll further to Sensors /
Measured values.
80 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Maintenance
In this window the maintenance intervals are listed
which are monitored by the machine controller.
Once the respective maintenance interval has
elapsed, the message Maintenance interval ex-
ceeded appears and the "spanner" symbol is
shown in the top line of the touch screen.
You may only reset the respective running time
counters if you have carried out the maintenance
work described in the chapter Maintenance.

tic.
2. Select Maintenance.
3. Reset the desired counter.
4. Confirm the prompt Mainte-

nance accomplished?.
Changing maintenance intervals

You can adapt the permitted production quantities
to your production conditions.
Caution
Incorrect settings may cause damage to
the assembly groups of the machine.
These settings must only be made by
qualified persons with sufficient experi-
ence.

tic.
2. Select Maintenance.
3. Switch to the second page.
4. Select the desired production

quantity and enter the desired
value.
5. Accept.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 81

Control settings
Shift data
1 2 3 4 5 6
Shift data
7
A shift is a defined period of production. A log is Displaying shift data

kept of data from individual shifts. The ending of You can view the data from the current and past
one shift begins a new shift (shift change). The shift shifts as follows:
change can be carried out manually or automatical-
ly by a primary system (e. g. TKN). 1. Select Diagnostics / Statis-
tic.
1 Shift start
2 Shift duration 2. Select Shift data.
3 Production
4 Efficiency Shift change at midnight
5 Number of faults The machine carries out a shift change at midnight
unless the shift change is triggered by a primary
6 Duration of the faults system, an operator change or manually.
7 Scroll bar for displaying further entries
Manual shift change
8 Next shift change
If a primary/higher level system does not trigger a
9 Press button: Perform shift change shift change, you can trigger it manually as follows:

tic.
2. Select Shift data.
3. Perform a shift change.
82 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Shift calendar
Shift calendar
3
2
4
1 6
In the shift calendar, you can file a weekly shift Changing the shift calendar
change plan. Up to 4 shift changes are possible per This is how you can change the shift calendar:
day.
The buttons in the Shift calendar window have the
tic.
following meanings:
1 Copy the shift times from one day to the next 2. Select Shift data.
2 Select calendar position and set or change

shift beginning 3. Scroll to Shift calendar.
3 Load shift data from CompactFlash card

4. Select calendar position.
4 Save shift data on CompactFlash card
5 Reset shift calendar to 24 hour shift, shift
5. Set or change the beginning
change 00:00 h
of the shift.
6 Accept changed shift calendar
Notes
You can use a CompactFlash card on the 6. Accept. Enter a further shift
KSZ5 module to exchange the data from beginning as in 4.
the shift calendar with other machines 7. Accept the shift calendar.
with the same controller.
The shift calendar is not available if shift
management is performed by a primary/
higher-level system.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 83

Control settings
Machine balancing
3 4
5
Machine balancing
2
8
Balance card Fine adjustment
1 9
11 10
17 Machine balancing
16
12
15
Calibrate DFK
14 13
1 Balance the card 8 Change delivery speed

2 Switch ICFD regulation on and off 9 Perform fine adjustment
3 Web thickness after balancing (ICFD setpoint 10 Switch sliver monitor on and off
value)
11 Switch CCD regulation on and off
white background: Actual values of web thick-
nesses on the left and right of the EASYFEED 12 Switch DFK regulation on and off
feed tray
13 Change DFK setpoint pressure
4 Sliver thickness after balancing (CCD setpoint
14 Balance the DFK tuft feeder
value)
white background: Actual value for sliver 15 Current drive speed of the feed roll (as a per-
thickness on the web funnel centage of the maximum)
5 Adjustment of draft as a percentage 16 DFK pressure actual value
6 Residual filling quantity of the can 17 DFK drive speed after balancing (as a per-
centage of the maximum)
7 Change sliver count
84 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Control settings
Reasons for machine balancing Carrying out balancing

It is always necessary to balance the machine if 1. Press the Machine balancing
you change the material or if the environmental button.
conditions have changed.
The card is equipped with three control circuits for The screen, as shown at the top of page 84, is dis-
ensuring the preset setpoint for the sliver count: played.
– on the DFK Tuft Feeder
Calibrating the DFK
– on the ICFD (feed tray on material feed unit)
and 2. Scroll further to the second
page.
– on the CCD (sliver cutter).
The three control circuits interact so that any dis- After the machine has run for a short time the but-
ruptive influences in one balancing area which are ton Balance DFK is activated. The current actual
within the predefined limits can be compensated by value for DFK air pressure is displayed below the
the others. The control range of the card (display motor speed percentage. If the actual value match-
D%: re-adjustment of entire draft as a percentage) es the setpoint:
lies within a range of ± 30 %. The card can keep
the sliver count consistently within this range by ad- 3. Press Calibrate DFK button.
justing the draft. If this range is exceeded the ma-
chine switches off.
The air pressure in the DFK's lower chute is then
Prerequisites for balancing measured in a series of four 20 second measure-
Before you can carry out machine balancing you ments and changed based on the measurements
need to have already entered all essential lot data recorded so that the setpoint for DFK pressure is
such as the desired sliver count, the delivery achieved.
speed, the DFK target pressure, the total draft and
other data. Balancing the card
The values with a white background are current ac- 4. If necessary, switch off the
tual values. ICFD control circuit; the green
field above is extinguished.
Control circuits activated; the
green field appears
Notes
Control circuits deactivated; The button Balance card is not activated
the green field is extinguished until the machine has run for a certain
amount of time. You can only balance the
card if the control circuits are deactivat-
ed. If the control circuits are not deacti-
vated, a prompt will appear accordingly.
5. Check the sliver count.
The value should be as near to the setpoint for sliv-
er count as possible. Once the sliver meets with
your expectations you can balance the entire card.
6. Press button Balance card.
The control circuits then make sure that the ICFD

actual value is adjusted to the setpoint.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 85

Control settings
Carrying out fine adjustment Activating sliver monitoring

Once you have balanced the card and produced Sliver monitoring monitors the sliver to check for
around 200 m, check the sliver count once again. compliance to limiting values for thick spots and the
Then enter the actual sliver count. The machine CV value independently of the 3-way control de-
then readjusts to achieve the predefined setpoint. scribed above.
7. Compare the sliver count with the predefined Short thick spots are detected as they pass through
setpoint. the CCD funnel. If the set number of thick spots per
kilometre of sliver is exceeded or if the set CV value
8. If the actual value does not is exceeded, a fault message is shown and the ma-
match press the button Carry terial transport stops.
out fine adjustment and en-
ter the measured sliver count To set the parameters for sliver monitoring see Set-
(actual value). ting limit values on page 68.
9. Accept. 10. Activate sliver monitoring sys-

tem; a green field appears
above.
Then assess the sliver count again and repeat the Deactivate sliver monitoring;
fine adjustment until the predefined sliver count the green field is extinguished.
has been achieved.
11. After machine balancing, re-
turn to the basic screen.
86 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Mechanical settings
This chapter contains recommended settings for Caution
the card which will enable you to set the card and Possible serious damage to the machine!
put it back into operation following a material Increasing the production and increasing
change. The specified values are designed to help the speed of the main cylinder generates
you to re-start the card after a material change more heat and thus causes the carding
without causing damage to the card. gaps to reduce.
Follow the settings specified in this chap-
However, you cannot achieve optimum quality until
ter to avoid causing damages.
you carefully adapt the settings to your material
and ambient conditions. The personnel carrying
Caution
out this setting work on the card must be appropri-
Possible serious damage to the machine!
ately qualified and have a wealth of experience.
After initial start-up of the card or after re-
placing the flats clothing, the gap be-
tween the flats and the main cylinder is
set larger to account for the opening up of
the flats clothing. This setting initially
causes the sliver quality to deteriorate.
Check the flats gap after a running-in pe-
riod and set it according to the values
which are entered in the Trützschler set-
ting log.
Caution
Damage to components and production
faults possible!
Incorrect settings can significantly disrupt
the production process and lead to exten-
sive repairs and adjustments.
Settings may only be changed by quali-
fied and authorised persons.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 87

Mechanical settings
Basic setting work

Setting the squeezing rolls
You can set the gap between the squeezing rolls 2
and the load of the squeezing rolls.
1
Note
Material-related setting dimensions for
the squeezing rolls can be found starting
on page 119.
Setting the gap between rolls (left)

1. Unscrew the lock nut (1).
2. Set the gap between rolls to the required
dimension using the adjusting screw (2).
3. Tighten the lock nut (1).
Setting the gap between rolls (right)

1. Loosen the locking screw (3) for the tension 5
roller to take the load off the toothed belt.
4
2. Loosen the lock nut (4) and set the gap
between the rolls using the adjusting screw
(5).
3. Tighten the lock nut (4) and check the gap
using a gauge.
4. Check the new gap at several positions
between the squeezing rolls using a feeler
gauge. 3
5. Tighten the locking screw (3) for the tension
roller and check the belt tension (see page
211).
88 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Setting the loading of rolls

1. Loosen the lock nut (1) and the adjusting nut 2
(2). 1
2. Set the adjusting nut according to the follow-

3
ing table so that the pressure spring (3)
achieves the desired pretensioning.
3. Secure the adjusting nut with a lock nut.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 on the left-hand side of
the machine.
Setting the loading of squeezing rolls
Pretensioning of Length of
spring [N] spring L2 [mm]
380 38
530 37
820 35
L2
1100 33
1400 31
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 89

Mechanical settings
Selecting delivery rolls

You use delivery rolls of different widths depending
on the material and required sliver weight. The up- 1
per delivery roll (1) is marked with the roll width.
Refer to the following table for the roll width which
is suited to your requirements. m
11m
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
Sliver weight [ktex] to to to to to to to to to to
3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0
Width of the Cotton 9 9 9 11 11 11 13 13 13 15

delivery roll
for: Synthetic 9 9 11 11 13 13 13 13 15 15
[mm] fibres
Blend 9 9 9 11 11 13 13 13 15 15
90 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Replacing the delivery rolls

1. Open the WEBSPEED and the measuring
funnel.
2. Relieve the belt tension.
3. Unscrew the lower screw (1) and remove the
lower delivery roll (2).
1
4. Unscrew the upper screw and remove the
upper delivery roll.
5. Push the upper delivery roll over the thrust

piece and the tensioning element onto the
shaft.
6. Push the lower delivery roll (3) over the thrust
piece (5) and the tensioning element (6) onto
the shaft.
7. Tighten the screws (4) for both delivery rolls
with 30 Nm torque.
Caution 3
Possible damage to card. The delivery
rolls must be clamped axially and it must
not be possible to turn them by hand.
4
Note
The settings on the delivery rolls are de-
scribed on the following pages. 5
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 91

Mechanical settings
Setting the delivery rolls

You can set the gap between the delivery rolls and
the load of the delivery rolls.
funnel.
Setting the position of the rolls

2. Loosen the locking screw (1) for the tension 2
roller (3) and the adjusting screw (2) to take
the load off the toothed belt.
1
3. Unscrew the screw (5) to release the front

delivery roll. 4 5
4. Set the front delivery roll to dimension (8) and

secure it using screw (5). 7
5. Unscrew the screw (4) to release the rear 0,1- 0,2
delivery roll.
6. Set the rear delivery roll to dimension (7) and
secure it using screw (4).
13 ± 0,10
92 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Setting the gap between rolls
The toothed belt is relieved of the load.

7. Loosen the lock nut (1) on the headless screw
1 2
(2).
8. Set the gap between rolls to the desired

dimension (3) using the headless screw (2). 3
0,1- 0,2
9. Tighten the lock nut and check the gap again.
10. Set the belt tension (see page 211) with the
adjusting screw and secure in place with the
locking screw.
4
11. Check the gap between delivery rolls using a
gauge.
34
Setting the loading of rolls
Note 5 6
Dimension (4) is set at the factory to 34
mm and thus corresponds to a loading of
400 N.
12. Loosen the lock nut (6).
13. Set the adjusting nut (5) according to the fol-
lowing table so that the pressure spring (7)
achieves the desired pretensioning.
7
14. Secure the adjusting nut with a lock nut.
15. Check and adjust the belt tension as neces-
sary.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 93

Mechanical settings
Setting the loading of the delivery rolls
Pretensioning of Length of
spring [N] spring L1 [mm] L1
0 38
200 36
400 34
600 32
800 30
94 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Setting the flexible bends
2 3
TC-PFS flexible bend adjustment

Both flexible bends must be inspected every time
after flats have been activated and readjusted as
necessary so that the carding gap between the flats
clothing and the cylinder clothing is set to the cor-
rect dimension. The card's TC-PFS flats adjust-
ment system is fitted with a lever (3) for manual ad-
justment. Using the manual actuating drive shift the
V-ledge (2) on the wedge-shaped flexible bend (1)
so that the carding gap between the flat and the cyl-
inder is altered. You can read the dimension of the
carding gap from the dial (4).
For information refer also to the section Activating
the revolving flat clothing in chapter Maintenance,
which starts on page 281. 5
Setting the TC-PFS reserve

For a new set of flats, set the distance to 6 on the
dial (=6/1000").
1. Unscrew and remove the locking screw on the
TC-PFS flats adjusting system (5).
2. Shift the V-wedge so that the carding gap is at
6 on the dial.
3. Screw in the locking screw on the TC-PFS.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 95

Mechanical settings
Basic settings for the flexible bends
2 2
After a clothing change on the flat or on the cylin-

der, you must inspect and readjust the basic set-
tings of the flexible bends. The TC-PFS system al-
lows an adjustment range of 8/1000" in individual
steps of 1/1000". You can select from this range
which adjustment range is to be used for techno-
logical settings and which adjustment range is to be
used for grinding reserve.
The measuring points 2, 3, 4 and 5 which are en-
graved on the side plate for measuring the carding
gap are situated in the extension of the adjusting 3
spindle (1).
Measuring points 1 and 6 are level with both bores
(2). To measure the carding gap at both these mea-
suring points you must position the flat so that one
of the flat's pins can just be seen in position (3).
96 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
For manual TC-PFS flat adjustment proceed as fol-

lows:
2
1. Remove every other flat from the upper flat
area (16 flats).
2. Then move the flats using the hand-held
remote control (2) so that the remaining flats 0
are in the carding area.
3. Loosen the fastening screws (1) on the flexi-
ble bends on both sides of the cylinder.
4. Measure the carding gap at measuring points

1 to 6 one after the other using a gauge and
set to the required value using the spindles.
Note 3
Press the flat lightly by hand at measur-
ing points 1 to 6 whilst setting in order to
prevent the flat from toppling.
5. Tighten the spindles with nuts (3) and (4) - 4
then check the carding gap once more and
readjust as necessary.
Caution
Card malfunction possible!
When refitting the flats make sure that the
direction of the clothing is correct.
6. Fit the flats.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 97

Mechanical settings
Tuft feeder feed roll
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
2,5 98
EASYFEED feed tray
2,1 … 2,5 83 … 98
0,15 … 0,3 6 … 12
1,0 40
98 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Setting the TC-PMS opening angle
min
0º max
15º
Using the lever (2), you can adjust angle a on the

TC-PMS blade adjustment system in the range of a
= 0° ... 15°. In this way, you determine the dimen-
sion of arc Â and thus the quantity of separated
waste. For initial start-up, Trützschler recommends
an opening angle a of between 5° and 10°. You can
read angle a from the dial (1).
In order to optimise the degree of cleaning, you
then carry out an analysis of the waste and adjust
opening angle a as necessary.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 99

Mechanical settings
Calibrating the feed table thick spots monitoring

EASYFEED
To do so, carry out the following working steps on 1
both sides of the machine.
1. Switch the card to service mode and scroll to
the Valve test page (see page 215).
2. Unfasten the headless screw (2) and shift the
plunger (1) so that the touch screen shows
"ICFD 0.5mm".
Caution
Risk of destroying the plungers. Only
tighten the headless screw lightly to se-
cure it in place. Excessive tightening will
cause the plunger to be crushed.
3. Tighten the headless screw (2) again.
2
Setting the depth of penetration of the

flat strips roll
Caution
Possible damage to the flats! When the
flats for the card are replaced you have to
reset the penetration depth of the flats
strips roll. The flat will otherwise be dam-
aged.
This applies in particular when replacing
CLASSIC TOP with MAGNOTOP flats.
– Turn the stop lever (2) clockwise in order to

separate the cleaning roll and the flats cloth-
ing (disengage); the stop bolt (1) locks this
position,
– pull the stop bolts and turn them anti-clock- 1
wise in order to lower the cleaning roll onto
the flats clothing (engage).
The flats cleaning unit must be in the engaged po-
sition for the following setting work. The penetration
depth of the flat strips roll is set according to the
height of the flats clothing as follows:
100 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
1. Run the flats system using the hand-held

remote control (4) until both flat's guide pins 1
can be seen in the drilled holes (1).
2. Undo the lock nuts (2) on the setting dial on
3. Turn both setting dials (3) clockwise until the
strips roll no longer touches the flats clothing.
2
3
0
4. Remove the flats pin and measure height H of

the flats clothing (from the tip of the wire to the
H
clothing clip) using a calliper gauge.
5. Install the flats pin again.
6. Set the gap (5) between the strips roll and the
flats clothing to 7/1000" on both sides of the
5
machine using the gauge (6).
7. Turn the strips roll down with the aid of the
setting dials so that the wires of the roll
6
engage with the flats clothing.
Example:
measured height of flats clothing H 0 4 mm,
turn setting dials five whole revolutions anti-clock-
wise;
this is equivalent to 5 x 0.8 mm = 4 mm
8. Tighten the lock nuts on the setting dial on
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 101

Mechanical settings
Gearing diagram for rolls and drives, TC 5-3

1 DFK feed roll
1 2 DFK opening roll
2 3 TC feed roll
3 4 Licker-in first opening roll

4
5 Second licker-in roll
5
6 6 Third licker-in roll

7
8 7 Cleaning roll for flat strips roll
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9 10 Doffer roll
11 Cleaning roll for stripping roll
12 Stripping roll
13 Pair of squeezing rolls
10 14 Pair of delivery rolls
11 Notes
12 Change wheels and motor pulleys with
the respective speeds are listed for spe-
13
cific materials in the following sections.
14
The illustration in the bottom section
shows the doffer area of the card with two
drive motors (option for the TC 5-3).
10
11
12
13
14
102 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

1 DFK feed roll
2 3 TC feed roll
3 4 Licker-in roll

5
6 Flat strips roll
6
7 Main cylinder
8 Doffer roll
7 9 Cleaning roll for stripping roll
10 Stripping roll
12 Pair of delivery rolls
8
Note
Change wheels and motor pulleys with
9
10
11
12
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 103

Mechanical settings
Changing draft V3 on the stripping roll
Doffer area with one motor (TC 5-1)
10
11
12
V3
13
14
Doffer area with two motors

(option for the TC 5-3)
10
11
12
V3
13
14
Change wheel Accessories and tools for

Stripping roll the card (ATB)
Number of 47 44
teeth z
Draft V3 1.272 1.19
104 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Setting draft V4
– On machines with only one motor on the
doffer area you set draft V4 by changing the
drive wheel [MW].
– On machines with two motors on the doffer
area you set draft V4 on the operating unit.

funnel.
10. Loosen the locking screw (2) for the tension
roller in order to take the load off the toothed
belt.
11. Unfasten the hexagon socket screw (1).
12. Remove the drive wheel [MW].
13. Fit the desired drive wheel.
14. Tension the toothed belt.
15. Close the WEBSPEED and the measuring
funnel.
1 MW 2
10
11
12
13
V4
MW
14
Drive wheel MW Accessories and tools for the card (ATB)
Number of 31 30 32 33 34 35
teeth z
Draft V4 1.237 1.197 1.277 1.317 1.357 1.397
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 105

Mechanical settings
Setting the speed of the cleaning roll for the stripper roll
10
11
12
13
14
Motor Cleaning roll
Mains fre- Diameter Rotary speed

quency [Hz] [mm] [min1]
50 50 2313
60 45 2510
106 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Setting the braking unit

You must match the settings for the BRE 2 bring
unit to the speed of the cylinder. Check the coding
switch using the following table before starting up
the card.
Main cylin- Coding switch

der speed S12/1 S12/2 S12/3 S12/4
up to
[rpm] (1) (2) (3) (4)
1
260 closed closed open open
2 5
360 open closed open open
460 closed open open open 3
560 open open open open
4
1. Switch the card off at the master switch and
secure it against being switched back on.
2. Set the coding switch as per the above table.
The following table lists the cylinder slow-down

times depending on mains voltage. The values may
vary depending on the belt tension or the operating
temperature of the motor.
Cylinder slow-down time [s]

Operating voltage at cylinder speed
Braking unit type
[V]
260 rpm 360 rpm 460 rpm 560 rpm
200 … 240 BRE 2 A 80 100 130 160
346 … 440 BRE 2 B 70 95 115 130
460 … 600 BRE 2 C 60 85 105 120
Note
Make sure that the drive belt on the cylin-
der do not slip during the braking proce-
dure.
3. If the drive belt slips, turn the potentiometer
(5) anti-clockwise to lengthen the cylinder
slow-down time.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 107

Mechanical settings
Setting the DFK outlet filter for transport air

At the top on the rear of the tuft feeder, you must set
the outlet filter for transport air so that the upper A
trunk has a constant filling level and the material in 1
it has an even density.
How the DFK outlet filter is equipped depends on 2
the number of machines in the installation (see fol-
lowing table). B
1 Air separator
2 Filter plate
3
3 Needle comb
Installation
Material and process
Individual machine 2 machines and up
Cotton
Ring-spun yarn combed or card-
ed B A
Cotton,
OE rotor-spun yarn
100 % synthetic fibres

PES / PAC B
Shiny viscose
Tuft blends of cotton and synthet-

ic fibres
Cotton and synthetic fibres with B A

flexibly groupable cards (flex
units)
Recycled and short fibres A
108 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
2
a
2 2
b
2 2
The schematic drawing shows examples of the set-

tings for the individual transport air outlet filters (2)
in an installation.
a = installation arranged in a line
b = installation arranged in a T-shape
Select the very small (5 ... 15 mm) openings (1) for
the slider to prevent web from building up on the in-
tegrated air separator.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 109

Mechanical settings
Settings for 100 % cotton

Settings dependent on production and speed
Adjust the production and main cylinder speed to Use the diagram and table in the following way:
each other so that their settings are within the tar-
1. Determine production.
get range shown inside the dotted line. Outside the
target range the sliver quality may drop and ma- 2. Select the suitable speed.
chine damage may be caused.
3. Read distances.
Examples:
– Increase in production from 60 kg/h to 95 kg/h with a constant main cylinder speed of 500 rpm:
Flat position Twin top and Doffer Licker-in
knife, to to
1 2 4 5 6 doffer side cylinder cylinder
3 e
14 13 12 14 11
]
[r pm 13 12 11 14 11
eed
de r sp 13 12 11 14 10
c ylin a nge 12 11 10 13 10
in tr
Ma Ta rge 11 10
12 13 10
Distance [1/1000 inch]

11 10 9 13 9
550 11 10 9 12 9
11 10 9 12 8
500 10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 11 8
450
400 10 9 8 11 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
– Increase in the main cylinder speed from 450 rpm to 500 rpm with constant production:
knife, to to
1 2 3 4 5 6 doffer side cylinder cylinder
e
14 13 12 14 11
] 12 11
[r pm 13 14 11
sp eed 13 12 11 14 10
nder
yli 12 11 10 13 10
in c
Ma 12 11 10 13 10
11 10 9 13 9
550 11 10 9 12 9
ge
et ran 11 10 9 12 8
g
Tar
500 10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 11 8
450
400 10 9 8 11 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
– Increase in main cylinder speed from 450 rpm to 500 rpm and increase in production from 80 kg/h to
100 kg/h:
knife, to to
1 2 3 4 5 6 doffer side cylinder cylinder
e
14 13 12 14 11
]
pm 13 12 11 14 11
d [r
rs pee 13 12 11 14 10
ylinde 12 11 10 13 10
c
ain 11 10
M 12 13 10
11 10 9 13 9
550 ge 11 10 9 12 9
ran
arget 11 10 9 12 8
T
500 10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 11 8
450
400 10 9 8 11 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
110 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Licker-in, 3 rolls
Caution
Possible serious damage to the machine!
Increasing the production and increasing the
speed of the main cylinder generates more 1/1000 inch
heat and thus causes the carding gaps to re- mm
duce.
= Setting point
Adhere to the distances specified in the fol-
lowing table to avoid causing damage. = Inspection point
0,55 22
II III
1,3 52 I
3,75 175
0,55 22
2,5 100
0,18 7 0,18 7
Gap from licker-in to

Setting point 1 cylinder
Licker-in speed
1300
11
] 11
1200 [rpm
ed 10
First licker-in speed [rpm]
r spe
nde 10
in cyli
1100 Ma 10
9
550 e 9
1000 ng
g e t ra
Tar 8
500 8
900
8
400 450 500 550 600
8
Main cylinder speed [rpm] 450
400 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 111

Mechanical settings
Licker-in, 1 roll
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
1,3 52
2,4 94
0,9 35
0,55 22
1,3 51
Gap from licker-in to

Licker-in speed
1300
11
] 11
1200 [rpm
ed 10
pe
d er s
ylin 10
in c
1100 Ma 10
9
550 9
1000 ge
et ran
g 8
Tar
500 8
900
8
400 450 500 550 600
8
400 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
112 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Basic setting for MTT extensions bends
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,7-1,25 28-50
C1 min. 1,0 min. 40 C2

8 1
0,56 22 1,0 40
7 2
6 3
5 0,89-1 35-40 0,89 35 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1,0 40 0,56 22
A2
1 8
A1
1. Set cover sections A1.2 and C1.2.

2. Install and set cover sections 4 and 5.
3. After setting, remove cover sections 4 and 5
and fit the MTT version.
A cover section for the MTT version 2.3 can be
found in the accessories for the card.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 113

Mechanical settings
Revolving flat
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
Adhere to the distances specified in the follow-
ing table to avoid causing damage. = Inspection point
3 4
2 5
1 6
The specified dimensions are the distances between the revolving flat clothing and the main cylinder
clothing.
Flat position
Setting points 1 … 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
14 13 12
13 12 11
]
pm
ee d [r 13 12 11
r sp
nde 12 11 10
in cyli
Ma 12 11 10
11 10 9
550 11 10 9
a nge
g et r 11 10 9
Tar
500 10 9 8
10 9 8
10 9 8
450
400 10 9 8
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
Note
For a re-clothing, or for a first fitting, se-
lect values which are around 4/1000''
higher. Measure the distance 100 mm
away from the end of the flat pin.
114 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Revolving flats details
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
0,7-1,5 28-60
0,7-1,5 28-60
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 115

Mechanical settings
Fixed flats in the pre-carding area

You can read the required distances for the types
of fitted Multi-Twin-Tops (MTT) directly from the fol-
lowing figures.
MTT 1.0 MTT 1.1, MTT 1.3

Cotton Cotton
B 2,03 80 B
2,03 80
8 8
0,41 16 0,41 16
7 7
0,56 22
6 0,56 22 6
5 1,27 50 5 1,27 50
4 4 0,46 18
0,41 16
3 3
0,56 22
2 2
0,46 18 1,27 50
1 1
0,48 19
MTT 1.2, MTT 1.4 MTT 1.5

Cotton with waste re- Bleached cotton
duction
2,03 80 B
2,03 80 B
0,41 16 8
8
7
1,27 50 7
0,56 22
1,27 50 6
6
0,56 22
5 1,27 50
5
1,27 50
4
4 0,46 18
0,51 20
3
3 1,27 50
0,56 22
1,27 50 2
2
1,27 50
0,56 22 1
1
1,27 50 0,56 22
0,48 19
116 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Fixed flats in the post-carding area

Replace the x values in the MTT diagrams with the Note
distances in the following table based on produc- Adjust the production and main cylinder
tion and speed. speed to each other so that their settings
are within the target range shown inside
the dotted line.
X: Gap between Outside the target range the sliver quality
Setting points x twin-top and knife, may drop and machine damage may be
doffer side
caused.
14
m] 14
[rp
ed 14
r spe
inde 13
in cyl
Ma 13
13

550 12
ge
t ran
rge 12
Ta
500 12
12
11
450
400 11
20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Production [kg/h]
MTT 1.0 MTT 1.1 - 1.4

Cotton Cotton with waste re-
duction
B x B x
x x
1
1
x
2
2
1,0 40 3
1,0 40 3
x 4 x
4
5 x
x 5
x
6
1,0 40 6
x 7 x
7
8 x
8
x
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 117

Mechanical settings
MTT 1.5
Bleached cotton
B 0,56 22
0,41 16
1
0,41 16
2
1,0 40 3
0,56 22
4
5
1,0 40
6
0,56 22
7
Symbol Fixed flat element
Cleaning element B
Cleaning element
Carding element
Cover section
118 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,5 20
1,5 60
2,5 100
0,5 20
0,2 8
2
0,18 7
Setting point 2
Material
mm 1/1000''
Cotton 0.08 3
Cotton with honeydew 0.25 10
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 119

Mechanical settings
Lower cover sections

Caution
duce.
= Setting point
1,5 60
1,0 40 4,0 157
1,5 60
Note
Adjust the production and main cyl- Gap from doffer to
inder speed to each other so that
their settings are within the target 11
range shown inside the dotted line. ] 11
pm
Outside the target range the sliver e d [r
spe 10
linder
quality may drop and machine dam- n cy 10
Mai
age may be caused. 10
9
550 ge 9
ran
get
Tar 8
500 8
8
8
450
400 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
120 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Change points, drive pulleys and rotational speeds

1 DFK feed roll
1
2 DFK opening roll
2
3 TC feed roll
3
4 Licker-in first opening roll
4
5 5 Second licker-in roll

6
6 Third licker-in roll
7
8
7 Cleaning roll for flat strips roll
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9
10 Doffer roll
12 Stripping roll

10
11
Notes
12
13 the respective speeds are listed for spe-
14
10
11
12
13
14
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 121

Mechanical settings

1 DFK feed roll
2 3 TC feed roll
3 4 Licker-in roll

5
6 Flat strips roll
6
7 Main cylinder
8 Doffer roll
10 Stripping roll
8
Note
9
10
11
12
122 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
DFK opening roll change point

Notes
For cotton, you must set the speed of the
revolving flat to 180 mm/min on the touch
screen.
1 ø1
3 ø2
4
--- 50 Hz ---
DFK opening Accessories and tools for

Motor pulley
roll change wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material/process
[mm] [mm] [rpm] [mm] [rpm]
Cotton / ring-spun yarn

200 795 112 1420
combed or carded
112
Cotton /
112 1420 200 795
rotor-spun yarn
--- 60 Hz ---
DFK opening Accessories and tools for

Motor pulley
roll change wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material/process

200 791 112 1412
combed or carded
93
Cotton /
112 1412 200 791
rotor-spun yarn
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 123

Mechanical settings
Licker-in change point
7
8
Note
Select the values in square brackets [...]
for initial start-up or after re-clothing.
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories and tools for

Licker-in motor pulley
the card (ATB)
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material/process
[mm] [rpm] [rpm] [rpm] [mm] [rpm]
Cotton / ring-spun yarn 120 994 1554 2047

135 2303
combed < 50 kg/h [112] [928] [1450] [1911]

combed > 50 kg/h 135 1119 1748 2303
120 2047
Cotton / [112] [928] [1450] [1911]
carded ring-spun yarn
Cotton / rotor-spun yarn 146 1210 1890 2491 135 2303
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories and tools for

the card (ATB)
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material/process
Cotton / ring-spun yarn 108 1080 1688 2224

112 2306
combed < 50 kg/h [90] [900] [1406] [1853]

combed > 50 kg/h 112 1120 1750 2306
108 2224
Cotton / [90] [900] [1406] [1853]
carded ring-spun yarn
Cotton / rotor-spun yarn 120 1200 1875 2471 112 2306
124 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Main cylinder change point
Caution
Risk of serious damage to the ma-
chine!
Increasing the production and increas-
ing the speed of the main cylinder gen-
erates more heat and thus causes the
carding gaps to reduce.
Follow the settings specified to avoid 9
causing damages.
10
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories and
Main cylinder
tools for the card Flat speed
motor pulley
(ATB)
Ø n Ø n v
Material/process
[mm] [rpm] [mm] [rpm] [mm/min]
Cotton / ring-spun yarn 175 460

190 500 180
combed < 50 kg/h [155] [407]

combed > 50 kg/h 190 500
175 460 180
[155] [407]
Cotton / carded ring-spun yarn
Cotton / rotor-spun yarn 190 500 210 552 180
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories and
Main cylinder
tools for the card Flat speed
motor pulley
(ATB)
Ø n Ø n v
Material/process
Cotton / ring-spun yarn 145 461

155 493 180
combed < 50 kg/h [125] [398]

combed > 50 kg/h 155 493
145 461 180
[125] [398]
Cotton / carded ring-spun yarn
Cotton / rotor-spun yarn 155 493 175 557 180
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 125

Mechanical settings
Settings for 100 % polyester

3. Read distances.
Examples:
Flat position Twin top and Licker-in and

knife, doffer
0
0
0
0
40
50
35
45
1 2 3 x 6 doffer side to cylinder

18 17 16 17 14
18 17 16 17 14
17 16 15 17 14
17 16 15 17 14
]
m
17 16 15 16 13
[rp
17 16 15 16 13
ed
14
e
pe
16 15 16 13
ng
rs
16 15 14 15 13
t ra
de
14
rge
16 15
lin
15 12

cy
14 13
Ta
15 14 12
ain
15 14 13 14 12
M
15 14 13 13 12
15 14 13 13 11
14 13 12 12 11
14 13 12 12 11
14 13 12 11 10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]

knife, doffer
0
0
0
0
40
50
35
45

18 17 16 17 13
18 17 16 17 13
17 16 15 17 13
17 16 15 17 13
]
m
17 16 15 16 12
[rp
17 16 15 16 12
ed
e
pe
16 15 14 16 12
ng
rs
14
t ra
16 15 15 12
de
rge
lin
16 15 14
15 11
cy
Ta
15 14 13 14 11
ain
15 14 13 14 11
M
15 14 13 13 11
15 14 13 13 10
14 13 12 12 10
14 13 12 12 10
14 13 12 11 9
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
126 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
95 kg/h:
knife, doffer
0
0
0
40
50
35
45
18 17 16 17 14
18 17 16 17 14
17 16 15 17 14
17 16 15 17 14
17 16 15 16 13
]
m
16 15 13
[rp
17 16
14
ed
16 15 16 13
pe
ge
16 15 14 15 13
rs
ran
16 14
de
15 15 12

et
lin
15 14 13 14 12
rg
cy
Ta
15 14 13 14 12
ain
13 13 12
M
15 14
15 14 13 13 11
14 13 12 12 11
14 13 12 12 11
14 13 12 11 10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 127

Mechanical settings
Licker-in, 3 rolls
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
0,55 22
II III
1,3 52 I
3,75 175
0,55 22
2,5 100
0,18 7 0,18 7
Licker-in speed Setting point 1 Gap from licker-in to

cylinder
0
0
0
0
40
35
50
1300
45
14
14
1200 14
14
m]
[rp
13
1100
ed
13
pe
13
rs

de
1000 13
ge
lin
12
ran
cy
12
in
et
Ma
900
rg
12
Ta
400 450 500 550 600 12

11
11
10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
128 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Licker-in, 1 roll
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
1,3 52
2,4 94
0,9 35
0,55 22
1,3 51
Setting point 1 Gap from licker-in to

cylinder
Licker-in speed
0
0
0
0
40
50
35
45
1300 14
14
14
1200 14
m]
rp
13
d[
13
e
1100
pe
13
rs

de
13
ge
lin
1000 12
ran
cy
12
in
et
Ma
rg
12
Ta
900 12
400 450 500 550 600 11
11
10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 129

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,7-1,25 28-50
C1 min. 0,64 min. 25 C2

8 1
0,64 25 0,64 25
7 2
6 3
5 0,89-1 35-40 0,89 35 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1,0 40 0,55 22
A2
1 8
A1

130 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Revolving flat
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
3 4
2 5
1 6
clothing.
Note
Setting points 1 … 6 For a re-clothing, or for a first fitting,
Flat position select values which are around 4/
0
0
0
0
1000'' higher. Measure the distance

40
50
35
45
1 2 3 4 5 6
18 17 16
18 17 16
100 mm away from the end of the
17 16 15 flat pin.
17 16 15
]
rpm
17 16 15
d[
17 16 15
ee
16 15 14
sp
16 15 14
r
de
16 15 14
lin

ang
cy
15 14 13
tr
in
15 14 13
Ma
rge
15 14 13
Ta
15 14 13
14 13 12
14 13 12
14 13 12
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 131

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
0,7-1,5 28-60
0,7-1,5 28-60
132 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

The required distances between the main cylinder
MTT 2.5
clothing and the tip of the blade, holding down de-
100 % polyester
vice or carding element can be read directly from
the following diagrams.
0,64 25 B
Note
8
All values apply in conjunction with the 0,36 14
recommended speeds for the main cylin-
7
der on page 140. 0,36 14
6
0,38 15
5
0,38 15
4
0,41 16
3
0,41 16
2
0,48 18
1

Replace the X values in the MTT diagram with the
MTT 2.5
gaps in the following table, in line with the desired
100 % polyester
production.
Setting points x X: Gap, Twin top

doffer side
0
0
0
0
40
50
35
45
B 0,64 25
17
1
17
17
17 X 2
m]
[rp
16
ed
16
pe
16 X 3
s
er
15
nd
ge
yli
15
c
ran
14 4
in
X
Ma
et
14
rg
Ta
13
13 5
12
12
11 6
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
7
Note
8
Adjust the production and main cylinder
speed to each other so that their settings
the dotted line.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 133

Mechanical settings
Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,5 20
1,5 60
2,5 100
0,5 20
0,2 8
0,25 10
0,18 7
Cleaning element B
Carding element
Cleaning element
Cover section
134 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

Caution
duce.
= Setting point
1,5 60
1,0 40 2,5 100
1,5 60
Note
Adjust the production and main cylin- Setting point 2 Gap from doffer to
cylinder
0
0
0
0
der speed to each other so that their

40
50
35
45
settings are within the target range 14

14
shown inside the dotted line. 14
Outside the target range the sliver 14
m]
[rp
quality may drop and machine dam- 13

ed
13
e
age may be caused.

sp
13
er
13
nd
ge
li
12
ran
cy
12
in
et
Ma
rg
12
Ta
12
11
11
11
10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 135

Mechanical settings

1 DFK feed roll
1
2 DFK opening roll
2
3 TC feed roll
3
4

6
7
8
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9
10 Doffer roll
12 Stripping roll

10
11
Notes
12
14
10
11
12
13
14
136 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

1 DFK feed roll
2 3 TC feed roll
3 4 Licker-in roll

5
6 Flat strips roll
6
7 Main cylinder
8 Doffer roll
10 Stripping roll
8
Note
9
10
11
12
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 137

Mechanical settings
Notes
For polyester, you must set the speed of
the revolving flat to 100 mm/min on the
touch screen.
1 ø1
3 ø2
4
--- 50 Hz ---
DFK opening roll change Accessories and tools for

Motor pulley
wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material
100 % polyester 112 112 1420 200 795
--- 60 Hz ---
DFK opening roll change Accessories and tools for

Motor pulley
wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material
100 % polyester 93 112 1412 200 791
138 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
7
8
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories
Licker-in motor pulley and tools for the card
(ATB)
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material
100 % polyester 112 928 1450 1911 102 1740
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories
Licker-in motor pulley and tools for the card
(ATB)
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material
100 % polyester 90 900 1406 1853 75 1544
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 139

Mechanical settings
Caution
chine!
Follow the settings specified to avoid
causing damages. 9
10
--- 50 Hz ---
Main cylinder Accessories and tools for

Flat speed
motor pulley the card (ATB)
Ø n Ø n v
Material
100 % polyester 155 407 135 355 100
--- 60 Hz ---
Main cylinder Accessories and tools for

Flat speed
motor pulley the card (ATB)
Ø n Ø n v
Material
100 % polyester 125 398 110 350 100
140 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Settings for 100 % viscose

3. Read distances.
Examples:
Flat position Doffer Licker-in
Twin top and to to
doffer side cylinder cylinder
1 2 3 4 5 6
] 16 15 14 16 10

[rpm
pe ed 15 14 13 15 10
d er s 15 14 13
ylin 15 9
in c
Ma 14 13 12 14 8
500 ng
e
t ra 14 13 12 14 8
rge
450 Ta 13 12 11 13 7
13 12 11 13 7
400 12 11 10 12 7
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
Flat position Doffer Licker-in
Twin top and to to
doffer side cylinder cylinder
1 2 3 4 5 6
] 16 15 14 16 10

pm
ee d [r 15 14 13 15 10
r sp
nde 15 14 13 15 9
in cyli
Ma 14 13 12 14 8
500 ng
e
14 13 12
t ra 14 8
450
rge 13 12 11 13 7
Ta
13 12 11 13 7
400 12 11 10 12 7
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
95 kg/h:
doffer side to to
1 2 3 4 5 6 cylinder cylinder
16 15 14 16 10
]
d [rpm 15 14 13 15 10
pee
d er s 15 14 13 15 9
ylin
in c 14 13 12 14 8
500 Ma g e
n 14 13 12 14 8
t ra
450 rge 13 12 11 13 7
Ta
13 12 11 13 7
400 12 11 10 12 7
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 141

Mechanical settings
Licker-in, 3 rolls
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
0,55 22
II III
1,3 52 I
3,75 175
0,55 22
2,5 100
0,18 7 0,18 7
Licker-in speed Setting point 1 Gap from licker-in to

cylinder
1300
pm
] 10
eed [r 10
r sp
de
1200 ylin 9
a in c ge 8
500 M
ran
r g et 8
1100 Ta
450 7
7
400 7
1000
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
900
400 450 500 550 600
Main cylinder speed [rpm]
142 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Licker-in, 1 roll
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
1,3 52
2,4 94
0,9 35
0,55 22
1,3 51
Setting point 1 Gap from licker-in to

cylinder
Licker-in speed
1300 ] 10
[rpm
sp eed 10
der 9
ylin
1200 in c e 8
500 Ma ng
e t ra 8
r g
Ta
450 7
1100 7
400 7
1000 350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
900
400 450 500 550 600
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 143

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,7-1,25 28-50 C3
C1 min. 0,64 min. 25
C2
8 1
0,64 25 0,64 25
7 2
6 3
5 0,89-1 35-40 0,89 35 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1,0 40 0,55 22
A2
1 8
A1

144 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Revolving flat
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
3 4
2 5
1 6
clothing.
Note
Setting points 1 … 6 For a re-clothing, or for a first fitting,
Flat position select values which are around 4/
1 2 3 4 5 6 1000'' higher. Measure the distance
] 16 15 14 100 mm away from the end of the flat
d [rpm 15 14 13
rspee pin.
nde 15 14 13
cyli e
i n 14 13 12
500 Ma ng
t ra 14 13 12
a rge
450 T 13 12 11
13 12 11
400 12 11 10
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 145

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
0,7-1,5 28-60
0,7-1,5 28-60
146 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

The required distances between the main cylinder MTT 2.1 viscose
clothing and the tip of the blade, holding down de-
vice or carding element can be read directly from
0,63 25 B
the following diagrams.
8 0,36 14
Note
All values apply in conjunction with the
7
recommended speeds for the main cylin- 0,36 14
der on page 154. 6
Symbol Fixed flat element 5 0,38 15
Cleaning element B 4
0,38 15
3
Carding element
2 0,41 16
Cover section
1 0,48 18
Fixed flats in the post-carding area MTT 2.1 viscose

Replace the X values in the MTT diagram with the
gaps in the following table, in line with the desired
production.
B 0,64 25
Setting points x X: Gap, Twin top 1
doffer side
X
16 2
]
pm 15
ed [r
pe
ylin
der s 14 X
500 in c ge
14 3
Ma
an 14
tr
450 g e 13
r
Ta 13 4
400 12
X
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
5
X
6
Note
Adjust the production and main cylinder
7
speed to each other so that their settings
the dotted line. 8
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 147

Mechanical settings
Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,5 20
1,5 60
2,5 100
0,5 20
0,2 8
0,2 8
0,18 7
148 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

Caution
duce.
= Setting point
1,0 40 2
1,5 60 2,5 100
1,5 60
Note
Adjust the production and main cylin- Setting point 2 Gap from doffer to
cylinder
der speed to each other so that their
] 10
[rpm

settings are within the target range ed 10
pe
shown inside the dotted line. der s 9
ylin
in c ge 8
Outside the target range the sliver 500 Ma n
e t ra 8
quality may drop and machine dam- rg
Ta
450 7
age may be caused. 7
400 7
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 149

Mechanical settings

1 DFK feed roll
1
2 DFK opening roll
2
3 TC feed roll
3
4

6
7
8
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9
10 Doffer roll
12 Stripping roll

10
11
Notes
12
14
10
11
12
13
14
150 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

1 DFK feed roll
2 3 TC feed roll
3 4 Licker-in roll

5
6 Flat strips roll
6
7 Main cylinder
8 Doffer roll
10 Stripping roll
8
Note
9
10
11
12
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 151

Mechanical settings
1 ø1
3 ø2
4
--- 50 Hz ---
Motor DFK opening Accessories and tools for

pulley roll change wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material
100 % viscose 112 112 1420 200 795
--- 60 Hz ---

Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material
100 % viscose 93 112 1412 200 791
152 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
7
8
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories and
tools for the card
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material
100 % viscose 112 928 1450 1911 102 1740
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories and
tools for the card
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material
100 % viscose 90 900 1406 1853 75 1544
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 153

Mechanical settings
Caution
chine!
causing damages.
10
--- 50 Hz ---
Main cylinder Accessories and tools Flat

motor pulley for the card (ATB) speed
Ø n Ø n v
Material
100 % viscose 155 407 135 355 100
--- 60 Hz ---

Ø n Ø n v
Material
100 % viscose 125 398 110 350 100
154 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Settings for polyacrylic, blends and recycled material

Licker-in, 3 rolls
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
0,55 22
II III
1,3 52 I
3,75 175
0,55 22
2,5 100
0,18 7 0,18 7
Licker-in speed
Carding produc- Setting point 1 1300
tion [kg/h]
mm 1/1000'' 1200
< 90 0.175 7 1100
> 90 0.229 9
1000
> 130 0.279 11
900
400 450 500 550 600
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 155

Mechanical settings
Licker-in, 1 roll
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
1,3 52
2,4 94
0,9 35
0,55 22
1,3 51
Licker-in speed
Carding produc- Setting point 1 1300
tion [kg/h]
mm 1/1000'' 1200
< 90 0.175 7 1100
> 90 0.229 9
1000
> 130 0.279 11
900
400 450 500 550 600
156 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,7-1,25 28-50 C3
C1 C3
C2
8 1
C1 C2
7 2
6 3
5 0,89-1 35-40 0,89 35 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1,0 40 0,55 22
A2
1 8
A1
Setting point C1 Setting point C2 Inspection point C3

Material
[mm] [1/1000''] [mm] [1/1000''] [mm] [1/1000'']
Polyacrylic 0.64 25 0.64 25 min. 0.64 min. 25
Blends and
0.56 22 1.02 40 min. 1.02 min. 40
all other materials

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 157

Mechanical settings
Revolving flat
Caution
duce.
= Setting point
3 4
2 5
1 6
The specified dimensions are the distances between the revolving flat clothing and the main cylinder clothing.
Gaps [1/1000'']
Carding production [kg/h]
1 2 3 4 5 6
< 50 14 13 12 12 12 12
< 100 14 13 12 12 12 12
Note
For a re-clothing, or for a first fitting, se-
lect values which are around 4/1000''
higher. Measure the distance 100 mm
away from the end of the flat pin.
158 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
0,7-1,5 28-60
0,7-1,5 28-60
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 159

Mechanical settings

The required distances between the main cylinder Note
clothing and the tip of the blade, holding down de- All values apply in conjunction with the
vice or carding element can be read directly from recommended speeds for the main cylin-
the following diagrams. der on page 169.
MTT 2.3 MTT 2.4

100 % polyacrylic Blends of polyester and
recycled material
0,63 25 B 0,64 25 B
8 0,36 14 8 0,36 14
7 7 0,36 14
0,36 14
6 6 0,56 22
0,36 14
5 1,27 50
5
0,38 15
0,38 15
4 4
0,38 15 0,38 15
3 3
0,41 16
0,41 16
2 2
0,41 16
0,41 16
1 1
0,46 18 0,48 18
MTT 3.1 MTT 3.2

Blends of synthetic fibres Recycled material
and cotton fibres
2,03 80 B
2,03 80 B
8
0,36 14
8 0,36 14
7
0,36 14
7 0,36 14
6
6 0,56 22 0,56 22
5
1,27 50
5 1,27 50
4 0,38 15
0,38 15
4
3 0,41 16
0,38 15
3 0,46 18
0,41 16 2
2 0,56 22
0,41 16 1
1,27 50
1
0,46 18 0,48 19
160 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

Production-related settings
Replace the x values in the MTT diagrams with the
distances in the following table in line with the de-
sired production.
Material/process/ Gaps in the post-carding area [1/1000'']

production B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Blends of polyester and

recycled material
MTT 2.4
MTT 3.2 < 90 kg/h 18 12 12 35/18 12 12 12 12
> 90 kg/h 20 14 14 45/20 14 14 14 14
Blends of synthetic fibres

and cotton, also on flex
units
MTT 3.1
< 90 kg/h 18 12 12 35/18 12 12 12 12
> 90 kg/h 20 14 14 45/20 14 14 14 14
MTT 2.3 MTT 2.4, MTT 3.2

100 % polyacrylic Blends of polyester and recycled material
MTT 2.3 MTT 3.2
B 0,63 25 B X
1 X 1
0,30 12
2 2
X
0,30 12
3 3
X
0,30 12
4 4
X
0,30 12 5 5
X
0,30 12 6 6
X
0,30 12
7 7
X
0,30 12
8 8
X
0,30 12
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 161

Mechanical settings
MTT 3.1
and cotton fibres
B X
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
X
5
X
6
X
7
X
8
X
Note
All values apply in conjunction with the
recommended speeds for the main cylin-
der on page 169.
Cleaning element B
Cleaning element
Carding element
Cover section
162 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,5 20
1,5 60
2,5 100 0,5 20
0,2 8
0,25 10
0,18 7
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 163

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
1,5 60
1,0 40 0,20 8
1,5 60
Setting point 2
Material
[mm] [1/1000'']
Polyacrylic 2.5 100
Blends of synthetic fibres and

3.5 138
cotton, recycled material
164 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

1 DFK feed roll
1
2 DFK opening roll
2
3 TC feed roll
3
4

6
7
8
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9
10 Doffer roll
12 Stripping roll

10
11
Notes
12
14
10
11
12
13
14
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 165

Mechanical settings

1 DFK feed roll
2 3 TC feed roll
3 4 Licker-in roll

5
6 Flat strips roll
6
7 Main cylinder
8 Doffer roll
10 Stripping roll
8
Note
9
10
11
12
166 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
1 ø1
3 ø2
4
--- 50 Hz ---

Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material/process
100 % polyacrylic,
112 112 1420 200 795
and cotton, flex units,
recycled material
--- 60 Hz ---

Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material/process
100 % polyacrylic,
93 112 1412 200 791
and cotton, flex units,
recycled material
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 167

Mechanical settings
7
8
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories and
tools for the card
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material/process
100 % polyacrylic 112 928 1450 1911 102 1740
Blends of synthetic and cotton fi-

120 994 1554 2047 112 1911
bres
Flex units with synthetic or cotton 112 928 1450 1911 102 1740
fibres 135 1119 1748 2303 120 2047
Recycled material 120 994 1554 2047 112 1911
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories and
tools for the card
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material/process
100 % polyacrylic 90 900 1406 1853 75 1544
Blends of synthetic and cotton fi-

108 1080 1688 2224 90 1853
bres
Flex units with synthetic or cotton 90 900 1406 1853 75 1544

fibres 112 1120 1750 2306 108 2224
Recycled material 108 1080 1688 2224 90 1853
168 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Caution
chine!
causing damages.
10
--- 50 Hz ---

Ø n Ø n v
Material/process
100 % polyacrylic 155 407 135 355 100
Blends of synthetic and cot-

175 460 155 407 150
ton fibres
Flex units with synthetic or 155 407 100

175 460
cotton fibres 190 500 180
Recycled material 175 460 155 407 180
--- 60 Hz ---

Ø n Ø n v
Material/process
100 % polyacrylic 125 398 110 350 100
Blends of synthetic and cot-

145 461 125 398 150
ton fibres
Flex units with synthetic or 125 398 100

145 461
cotton fibres 155 493 180
Recycled material 145 461 125 398 180
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 169

Mechanical settings
Current settings on this machine

Enter the specific machine or production-related in-
formation and settings for this machine in the fol-
lowing fields.
Customer:
Comm. No.:
Card No.:
Date:
Name:
Material:
Provenience:
Staple:
Micronaire:
Delivery m/min
speed:
Sliver No.:
Production : kg/h
Air humidity: %
Temperature: °C
Uster CV: %
CV (card): %
Clothings
Feed roll
Licker-in
Main cylinder
Flat
Doffer
170 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
DIRECTFEED tuft feeder
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
Feed tray, EASYFEED
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 171

Mechanical settings
Licker-in, 3 rolls
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
II III
172 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Licker-in, 1 roll
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 173

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
C3
C1 C2
8 1
7 2
6 3
5 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1 8
A1
A2
174 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Revolving flat
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
3 4
2 5
1 6
PFS
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 175

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
176 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings

Enter the set gaps in the empty fields depending on
the fitted elements.
MTT 1.0 MTT 1.1, MTT 1.3
B B
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
MTT 1.2, MTT 1.4 MTT 1.5
B
B
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 177

Mechanical settings
MTT 2.1 MTT 2.3
B B
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
MTT 2.4 MTT 2.5
B B
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
178 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
MTT 3.1 MTT 3.2
B B
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 179

Mechanical settings
MTT 1.0 MTT 1.1 - 1.4
B B
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
MTT 1.5 MTT 2.1
B
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
180 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
MTT 2.3 MTT 2.4
B
B
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
MTT 2.5 MTT 3.1
B
B
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 181

Mechanical settings
MTT 3.2
182 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Mechanical settings
Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
Load:
N
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 183

Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
184 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults
Faults
Fault messages
If a fault occurs, the red "Fault" symbol appears in
the top row of buttons, a fault message window is
displayed and the material transport system is
stopped. All faults are recorded in the log book.
Faults take priority over warnings.
Structure of a fault message
1
E0336 Squeezing rolls left
5 4 3
1 Fault number and fault message Note

If the fault has not yet been remedied, the
2 Location designation, electrical equipment
button (6) appears in grey and you can-
(for Trützschler after-sales service staff only)
not acknowledge the fault. When the fault
3 Press button: Acknowledge fault has been remedied, the symbol changes
to red and the fault can then be acknowl-
4 Press button: Next fault
edged.
5 Press button: Additional information for Trüt-
zschler after-sales service department
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 185

Faults
In the event of a fault, proceed as follows: The following table is arranged in ascending order
of fault message numbers.
1. With the help of the fault message, localise
and remedy the fault.
Note
2. Acknowledge the fault by If a fault message is displayed and a but-
pressing the button (red). ton outside the fault message window is
pressed, the fault message will disap-
3. Start the card again. pear. However, the fault has not yet been
acknowledged.
In this case, press the button "Call up
Fault table fault message" in the top row of buttons
If a fault occurs during machine operation that you again to display the fault message again.
cannot remedy using the fault table below, please The fault can then be remedied and ac-
contact the Trützschler after-sales service depart- knowledged in the fault message window
ment. with button (6).
No. Fault message Cause or significance Remedy
124 Plant not ready for operation Feeder installation is not ready Remedy fault in the feeder in-
for operation. stallation,
start feeder installation again,
wait until feeding pressure is
reached.
141 Sliver break The carded sliver has broken. Check the carded sliver.
Thread the carded sliver into
the coiler cover.
142 Sliver cutter The sliver cutter on the coiler is Check the sliver cutter's pneu-
not moving. matic drive and the mechanical
setting.
150 CAN communication bus doffer A CAN communication fault Check the cable connections of
drive has occurred in the area of the the bus system.
doffer drive.
The fault message cannot be
acknowledged. Carry out a
system reset with the master
switch.
155 CAN communication feeder A CAN communication fault Check the cable connections of
drive has occurred in the area of the the bus system.
feed mechanism drive.
switch.
186 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults

156 CAN bus malfunction A fault has occurred in the CAN Check the cable connections of
bus system. No reaction from the bus system.
several or all the bus subscrib-
ers.
switch.
157 CAN communication IDF deliv- A fault has occurred in the CAN Check the cable connections of
ery unit drive bus system in the area of the the bus system.
delivery drive.
switch.
167 Flats drive The rotational speed of the Check the flats drive.
card flats is too low.
179 DFK opening roll not started The opening roll has not start- Check motor, sensors, belts
ed. and belt tension.
180 DFK opening roll speed not The specified opening roll Check motor, sensors, belts
reached speed is not reached. and belt tension.
181 DFK opening roll speed too low The specified opening roll Check motor, sensors, belts
speed was reached - but then and belt tension.
dropped again.
183 Turnstile drive not started The turnstile has not moved at Check the corresponding sen-
the can change. sor and the turnstile drive.
195 Feed monitoring The inlet monitor has tripped Reverse the machine (see
due to the feed of excessively page 206).
thick material.
207 Enable servo card deposit The limit switches connected to Check the limit switches
the enable input of the servo against the electrical circuit di-
modules are not the same as agram.
the corresponding limit switch
terminal on the controller.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 187

Faults

208 Enable servo card delivery The limit switches connected to Check the limit switches
209 Enable servo card doffer The limit switches connected to Check the limit switches
210 Enable servo card feeder The limit switches connected to Check the limit switches
211 Frequency converter flats drive The frequency converter of the Check the corresponding fre-
flats drive is not ready for oper- quency converter.
ation.
212 Frequency converter DFK The frequency converter of the Check the corresponding fre-
feeder DFK feeder drive is not ready quency converter.
for operation.
214 Main cylinder frequency con- The cylinder drive's frequency Check the corresponding fre-
verter converter is not ready for oper- quency converter.
ation.
215 Frequency converter rotary The frequency converter of the Check the corresponding fre-
can plate rotary can plate drive is not quency converter.
ready for operation.
216 Licker-in frequency converter The frequency converter of the Check the corresponding fre-
licker-in drive is not ready for quency converter.
operation.
236 ICFD maximum value exceed- The difference between the Check the entered tolerance
ed web feed at the ICFD and the limit.
calibration value is larger than
Reduce the trunk opening to
that set in Web thickness tol-
reduce the density of the web.
erance (Settings/Program-
ming > Machine settings ).
240 DFK pulse from RIK not active The RIK board receives no Check the corresponding sen-
pulses from the safety monitor- sors.
ing system of the DFK.
188 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults

241 Pulse deposit drive The ADB3 board has regis- Check cable connections,
tered no pulses from the de- check the ADB3 board, check
posit servo module. the servo module.
242 Pulse feeder drive The ADB3 board has regis- Check cable connections,
tered no pulses from the feeder check the ADB3 board, check
servo module. the servo module.
243 Pulse main cylinder from RIK The RIK board receives no Check the corresponding sen-
not active pulses from the safety monitor- sors.
ing system of the main cylinder.
244 Pulse licker-in from RIK not ac- The RIK board receives no Check the corresponding sen-
tive pulses from the safety monitor- sors.
ing system on the licker-in.
246 WEBSPEED monitoring The Webspeed is open. Close the Webspeed.

Check the limit switches.
248 Comb box Locking arm on comb box is Lock the comb box correctly
not closed. with the locking arm. Check the
limit switches.
258 Can magazine is empty No empty can is available in Place an empty can into the
the can changer. can changer. Check the limit
switches.
259 Can magazine is full There is still a full can in the Transport the full can out of the
can changer. can changer. If necessary,
check the corresponding limit
switch.
263 Can change A fault has occurred during the Perform a manual can change.
can change.
302 Metal detector Metal particles detected in the Reverse the machine (see
web. page 206) and remove the
metal particles.
311 Motor protection switch has A motor protection switch has Check the settings on the mo-
tripped tripped due to an overload. tor protection switch. Check
the drive concerned, turn on
the motor protection switch
again.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 189

Faults

312 Motor thermistor has tripped The drive motor for the cylin- Check the affected drive and
der, licker-in or optional filter eliminate the cause of over-
box has become too hot (only heating.
applies to fixed frequency mo-
tors).
320 EMERGENCY STOP An emergency stop button has Establish the reason for the
been pressed. emergency stop, remedy the
cause and release the emer-
gency stop button again.
336 Squeezing rolls left A thick spot has entered the Remove thick spots, re-start
card between the squeezing the card and check the respec-
rolls on the left-hand side. tive sensor as necessary.
337 Squeezing rolls right A thick spot has entered the Remove thick spots, re-start
card between the squeezing the card and check the respec-
rolls on the right-hand side. tive sensor as necessary.
363 Coil deposit plate sensor No signal from the sensor at Check the corresponding sen-
sliver coil plate. sor.
368 Doffer servo drive A fault has occurred on the de- Press the (i) button and pro-
posit servo drive. ceed according to the detailed
information.
369 Delivery unit servo drive A fault has occurred on the ser- Press the (i) button and pro-
vo drive of the delivery unit. ceed according to the detailed
information.
377 Feeder servo drive A fault has occurred on the Press the (i) button and pro-
feeder servo drive. ceed according to the detailed
information.
380 Safety circuit is interrupted The safety circuit is interrupted Check the limit switches.
and no feedback was detected
Check the plug connectors or
from the limit switch terminals.
clamp terminals.
382 Fuse monitoring The fuse has tripped. Reset the fuse. If necessary,
check whether a short circuit or
overload has occurred.
190 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults

385 Memory error Changes have been made on If the error occurs again after
the machine. The control pro- switching on, check the battery,
gram has been changed or a check the dip switches for the
genuine memory error has oc- battery and acknowledge the
curred. fault. If the error endures, in-
form the Trützschler after-sales
service department.
386 EEprom memory error The EEPROM is defective or Acknowledge the fault. If the
the control program has been error endures, inform the Trüt-
replaced. zschler after-sales service de-
partment.
391 Blockage on sliver coil plate The sliver material is piling up Eliminate the sliver material
on the sliver coiling plate. blockage and thread in the sliv-
er again. If necessary, check
the corresponding sensor.
404 Machine controller tempera- The temperature in the ma- Switch off the machine and al-
ture chine controller is too high. low it to cool.
Check the control cabinet fan.
413 Main cylinder not started The main cylinder has not start- Check motor, sensors, belts
ed. and belt tension.
416 Main cylinder speed not The specified main cylinder Check motor pulley.
reached speed is not reached.
417 Main cylinder speed exceeded The specified main cylinder Check motor, sensors, belts
speed was reached - and con- and belt tension.
tinued to rise.
419 Doors DFK The doors on the DFK could Check the respective safety
not be locked. locking device.
420 Doors left The doors on the left-hand side Check the respective safety
could not be locked. locking systems.
421 Doors right The doors on the right-hand Check the respective safety
side could not be locked. locking device.
426 Suction pressure monitoring The measured suction pres- Check the system filter. If nec-
sure is below the set pressure. essary, check the correspond-
ing pressure switch.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 191

Faults

430 CV value monitoring The CV value is higher than the Check the settings in CV value
value set under CV value limit limit (Settings/Programming
(Settings/Programming > > Limits).
Limits).
Remove fibre build-up from the
web doffing area.
431 Thick spots monitoring The number of thick spots is Check the information in Thick
higher than the value set under spot limit value (Settings /
Thick spot limit value (Set- programming > Limits).
tings/Programming > Limits)
Remove fibre build-up from the
web doffing area.
451 Draft deviation The current draft deviates from Start the machine again, check
the set draft (Settings/Pro- the sliver count, balance the
gramming > Lot data > Mini- card again.
mum draft or Maximum draft)
by more than ± 30 %.
455 Licker-in not started The licker-in has not started. Check motor, sensors, belts
and belt tension.
456 Licker-in speed not reached The specified licker-in speed is Check motor, sensors, belts
not reached. and belt tension.
457 Licker-in speed too low The specified licker-in roll Check motor, sensors, belts
speed has been achieved - but and belt tension.
then dropped again.
465 DFK maintenance flap The maintenance flap on the Close the maintenance flap. If
DFK is open. necessary, check the corre-
sponding limit switch.
470 Lap monitoring on delivery roll There is a thick spot between Remove the thick spot from the
the CCA delivery rolls. CCA delivery rolls. If neces-
sary, check the corresponding
sensor.
192 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults
475 Deposit servo drive A fault has occurred on the de- Press the (i) button and pro-
posit servo drive. ceed according to the detailed
information.
479 CAN communication deposit A fault has occurred in the CAN Check the cable connections of
drive bus system in the area of the the bus system.
deposit drive.
switch.
481 Main cylinder speed too low The specified main cylinder Check motor, sensors, belts
speed was reached - and is and belt tension.
dropping again.
506 Cover safety mechanism The protective hood on the coil- Close the protective hood on
er is not closed properly. the coiler.
516 Lap monitoring calender left There is a lap on the calender Remove the lap.
roll on the left-hand side.
517 Lap monitoring roll 1 left There is a lap on the roll 1 on Remove the lap.
the left-hand side.
the left-hand side.
the left-hand side.
520 Lap monitoring calender right There is a lap on the calender Remove the lap.
roll on the right-hand side.
the right-hand side.
526 Sliver breakage limit switch Material jam in the coiler's sliv- Clear the material jam.
er coiling tube.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 193

Faults

527 External EMERGENCY STOP The emergency stop button on After eliminating the cause, re-
the primary/higher level instal- lease the emergency stop but-
lation controller has been acti- ton on the primary/higher level
vated. installation controller and
check the indicated terminals.
593 CAN communication main cyl- A fault has occurred in the CAN Check the cable connections of
inder drive bus system in the area of the the bus system.
main cylinder drive.
acknowledged.
Carry out a system reset with
the master switch.
594 CAN communication licker-in A fault has occurred in the CAN Check the cable connections of
drive bus system in the area of the the bus system.
licker-in drive.
acknowledged.
Carry out a system reset with
the master switch.
705 Funnel control (+) The value for the sliver count Look for and clear the cause for
has suddenly been exceeded. the thick spot.
711 Funnel control (-) The sliver count has suddenly Look for and clear the cause for
dropped below the set value. the thin spot.
721 Material suction monitoring The measured suction pres- Check the system filter. If nec-
727 Flat strips suction monitoring The measured suction pres- Check the system filter. If nec-
985 TMB1 defect Fault on the T-CON TMB1 Check and replace the TMB1
module. module as necessary.
194 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults
1086 T-CON - contact with cylinder The T-CON has detected a Locate the contact point ac-
wire contact between the cylinder cording to the location indicat-
and licker-in, flats pins, doffer ed on the title line of the touch
or a twin top cassette (too screen. Remove the respective
many pulses per unit of time). components and eliminate the
cause of the contact. Set all el-
ements according to the setting
plan.
1087 T-CON - continuous contact The T-CON has detected a Remove the respective compo-
continuous contact (> 60 s) be- nents and eliminate the cause
tween the cylinder and licker- of the contact. Set all elements
in, doffer or a twin top cassette. according to the setting plan.
1088 T-CON - aborted self-test A fault has occurred on the T- Check the T-CON modules
CON system. (see information starting on
page 216).
1386 DFK slide valve The slide valve on the tuft feed- Check the mechanics, the
er has not opened properly. compressed air supply and the
mechanical settings.
1486 T-CON - Contact measurement The carbon pin has no contact Check the carbon pin.
intermitted with the cylinder hub for a short
Check all T-CON modules.
time.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 195

Faults
Warnings
Warnings indicate events on the machine that
should be noted by the operator. In the event of a 1. Display: Warning
warning, the signal lamp lights up in yellow and the Press key: Display the current
machine continues to run. A warning remains in warning.
place until the limiting value which has been ex-
ceeded, for instance, is undershot again. Warnings 2. On the basis of the warning, determine the
are not constantly shown on the touch screen if in location of the problem and remedy the
addition faults have occurred. Only when all the cause.
faults have been acknowledged does the corre- Warnings are recorded in the logbook.
sponding symbol for the warning appear in the top
line of the basic mask again. The following table is arranged in ascending order
of warning message numbers.
No. Warning Cause or significance Action
62 Thick spots Thick spots identified in the Check and clean the transfer
sliver. areas from the cylinder doffer
to the CCD funnel.
144 Sliver monitoring deactivated The sliver monitoring has been Select dialogue window Ma-
switched off via the Machine chine balancing and activate
balancing dialogue box. sliver monitoring again.
162 CCD regulation deactivated CCD regulation has been de- Select the dialogue window
activated in the dialogue win- Machine balancing and acti-
dow Machine balancing. vate CCD regulation again.
173 DFK regulation switched off DFK regulation has been deac- Select the dialogue window
tivated in the dialogue window Machine balancing and acti-
Machine balancing. vate DFK regulation again.
175 DFK deactivated The tuft feeder has been Select the Settings / program-
switched off. ming > Service functions
menu. Press button DFK ac-
tive to switch on the DFK.
235 ICFD regulation deactivated Regulation has been switched none

off manually.
259 Can magazine is full There is still a full can in the Transport the full can out of the
can changer. can changer.
If necessary, check the corre-
sponding limit switch.
Note
The point at which this warning appears depends on the can
monitoring setting in the menu Settings / programming > Ma-
chine settings.
196 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults

303 Metal detector deactivated The metal detector has been Select the Settings / program-
switched off. ming > Service functions
menu. Press the Metal detec-
The system controller switches
tor button to switch on the met-
the metal detector on again au-
al detector.
tomatically after a set period of
time.
404 Machine controller tempera- The temperature in the ma- Switch off the machine and al-
ture chine controller is too high. low it to cool.
Check the control cabinet fan.
406 TKN network fault A fault has occurred in the TKN Switch on the plant control.
network.
Check the TKN connection.
407 TKN network not active Machine starts, but has not yet Switch on the plant control.
received data in the plant con-
Check the TKN connection.
trol unit.
427 Suction pressure monitoring The suction pressure monitor- Select the Settings / program-
deactivated ing has been switched off. ming > Service functions
menu. Press the Suction
pressure monitoring button
the monitoring on again auto-
to switch the function on.
matically after a set period of
time.
486 Webspeed key activated The Webspeed key has been Press the Webspeed key to
pressed and the Webspeed is close the Webspeed.
open.
542 Twin-Tops (Licker-in) The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
elapsed. cancel maintenance work.
543 Flats The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
544 Cylinder The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
545 Twin-Tops (doffer) The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
546 Doffer The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 197

Faults

597 Check diameter of pulleys The speed on one or more belt Check the diameter of the belt
pulleys is too high because a pulleys. Fit belt pulleys with the
belt pulley with the wrong diam- correct diameter.
eter has been fitted.
727 Flat strips suction monitoring The measured suction pres- Check the system filter. If nec-
739 Funnel monitoring switched off The funnel monitoring has Select the Settings / program-
been switched off. ming > Service functions
menu. Press the Funnel con-
trol button to switch the func-
the monitoring on again auto-
tion on.
matically after a set period of
time.
1092 EASYFEED left, no movement The feed lattice is not moving Check the feed lattice and free
or is stuck. it.
1093 EASYFEED right, no move- The feed lattice is not moving Check the feed lattice and free
ment or is stuck. it.
1094 EASYFEED too uneven The compacted web is distrib- Check the tuft feeder.
uted too unevenly over the feed
Check the feed lattice and free
lattice.
it up as necessary.
1103 T-CON - monitoring deactivat- T-CON monitoring has been Switch T-CON monitoring on.
ed switched off.
1216 Carding gap too small - licker- The carding gap between the Stop the card and set the card-
in licker-in and the cylinder has ing gap according to the setting
dropped below the permitted plan (see information starting
dimension. on page 110).
1228 Carding gap too small - MTT The carding gap between the Stop the card and set the card-
licker-in side twin top cassettes and the cyl- ing gap according to the setting
inder on the licker-in side has plan (see information starting
dropped below the permitted on page 110).
dimension.
1229 T-CON - Temperature sensor One of the T-CON system's Check all the T-CON tempera-
defective temperature sensors is faulty. ture sensors the replace faulty
sensor.
198 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults
1230 Carding gap too small - flats The carding gap between the Stop the card and set the card-
flats pins and the cylinder has ing gap according to the setting
1231 Carding gap too small - MTT The carding gap between the Stop the card and set the card-
doffer side twin top cassettes and the cyl- ing gap according to the setting
inder on the doffer side has plan (see information starting
dropped below the permitted on page 110).
dimension.
1244 ICFD to be checked The feed lattice is not moving Check the feed lattice and free
or is stuck. it.
1262 Carding gap too small - doffer The carding gap between the Stop the card and set the card-
doffer and the cylinder has ing gap according to the setting
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 199

Faults
LED displays in the control cabinet

During troubleshooting, the LEDs of the electronic
modules in the control cabinet can give additional
information.
Red LEDs indicate a fault. Green LEDs normally
indicate the normal operation of a component.
Overview of the control elements in the

control cabinet
1 2
1 KSZ5 module
2 Digital input/output module (DEA2);
fitted to central unit (KSZ5)
200 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults
KSZ5 module
The KSZ5 module is the basic module for machine
control.
L1 Run – KSZ5 in operation
L2 Err – KSZ5 error
Z0 LED flashes: DFK opening roll is rotating

Z1 LED flashes: Main cylinder is rotating
Z2 LED flashes: Licker-in is rotating
Z3 LED flashes: TC feed roll is rotating
Z4 LED flashes: Delivery drive is rotating
Z5 LED flashes: Sliver coilign plate is rotating
Z6 LED flashes: T-CON contact measuring
Z7 –
Z8 –
Z9 –
13 Z10 –
KSZ5
12
11 Z11 Input, T-CON selftest
10
9 Z12 Input, flats strips roll pressure monitoring,
8
7 1 = OK
6
Z13 Input, plant control unit ready for operation
5
4
3
2
1
0
L2 L1
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 201

Faults
DEA2 data input and output module

The DEA2 input/output module is fitted on the
KSZ5 and KIM1 modules.
A1.0 –
A1.1 –
E10.7
A1.2 Fan
E10.6 A1.3 –
E10.5
E10.4
A1.0 E10.3
A1.1 E10.2 A2.0 LED on: Main cylinder delta contactor
E10.1
A1.2 E10.0 LED off: Main cylinder star contactor
A1.3
A2.0
E9.7 A2.1 T-CON selftest
E9.6
A2.1 E9.5 A2.2 Sliver break
A2.2 E9.4
A2.3 E9.3 A2.3 Enable, FC1 delivery
E9.2
A3.0 E9.1
A3.1 E9.0
A3.2 E8.7
A3.0 Can changer
A3.3 E8.6 A3.1 Doffer cleaning roll
A3.4 E8.5
A3.5
E8.4 A3.2 DFK drives
E8.3
A3.6 E8.2 A3.3 Intermittent exhaustion active
A3.7 E8.1
E8.0 A3.4 Revolving flat cleaning roll
A4.0
A4.1
E7.7 A3.5 Main cylinder forwards
A4.2 E7.6
A4.3 E7.5 A3.6 Main cylinder reverse
A4.4 E7.4
A4.5 E7.3 A3.7 Licker-in
A4.6 E7.2
A4.7 E7.1
DEA2
E7.0
A5.0
E6.7
A4.0 Main cylinder brake off
A5.1
A5.2
E6.6 A4.1 Main cylinder on, door locking on
E6.5
A5.3 A4.2 Emergency stop acknowledgement
E6.4
A5.4
E6.3
A5.5 A4.3 Indicator lamp, red
E6.2
A5.6
E6.1
A5.7 E6.0 A4.4 Indicator lamp, yellow
A4.5 Indicator lamp, green
A4.6 Indicator lamp, reversing key
A4.7 FU1 parameter set of starting speed
A5.0 Funnel valve, blowing

A5.0 Gore-shaped gap valve, blowing
A5.2 Webspeed valve, closed
A5.3 Valve, DFK slide valve
A5.4 –
A5.5 –
A5.6 –
A5.7 –
202 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults
E8.0 KHC-CA or CC squeezing rolls, 1 = OK

E8.1 KHC-CA or CC hood safety mechanism
E10.7
closed
E10.6 E8.2 KHC-CA or CC sliver monitoring system,
E10.5
E10.4 1 = darkened
A1.0 E10.3
A1.1 E10.2 E8.3 No fault, emergency stop circuit
E10.1
A1.2 E10.0 E8.4 External emergency stop
A1.3
A2.0
E9.7 E8.5 Doors, right
E9.6
A2.1 E9.5 E8.6 Doors, left
A2.2 E9.4
A2.3 E9.3 E8.7 Emergency stop
E9.2
A3.0 E9.1
A3.1 E9.0
A3.2 E8.7
E9.0 Acknowledge DFK door or lap roll feeding
A3.3 E8.6 pre-signal
A3.4 E8.5
A3.5
E8.4 E9.1 Motor thermistor in main cylinder circuit
E8.3
A3.6 E8.2 E9.2 Main cylinder circuit motor protection,
A3.7 E8.1
E8.0 1 = OK
A4.0
A4.1
E7.7 E9.3 Fuse monitoring 24V AC, 1 = OK
A4.2 E7.6
A4.3 E7.5 E9.4 Comb box closed
A4.4 E7.4
A4.5 E7.3 E9.5 Calendar unit, 1 = OK
A4.6 E7.2
A4.7 E7.1 E9.6 Squeeze rolls left, 1 = OK
DEA2
E7.0
A5.0
E6.7
E9.7 Squeeze rolls right, 1 = OK
A5.1
E6.6
A5.2
E6.5
A5.3 E10.0 Metal inlet monitoring, 1 = OK
E6.4
A5.4
E6.3
A5.5 E10.1 DFK maintenance flap or lap roll feeding
E6.2
A5.6
E6.1
A5.7 E6.0 main signal
E10.2 Material transport motor protection, 1 = OK
E10.3 Reversing button
E10.4 FC1 delivery unit ready for operation
E10.5 Sensofeed+ material feed monitoring, left
or DFK slide valve open
E10.6 Sensofeed+ material feed monitoring, right
E10.7 –
E6.0 Stationary from main cylinder, licker-in, DFK

E6.1 Main cylinder rotating
E6.2 Licker-in rotating
E6.3 DFK rotating, lap roll feeding pre-signal
E6.4 Service mode switched on
E6.5 Flats drive relieved
E6.6 Flats drive monitoring
E6.7 Pressure monitoring, 1 = OK
E7.0 Manual adjustment, flats drive not stop

E7.1 Manual adjustment, flats drive forwards
E7.2 Manual adjustment, flats drive reverse
E7.3 CM or CA delivery rolls lap formation moni-
toring
E7.4 KHC-CA or CC in position
E7.5 KHC-CA or CC empty can available
E7.6 KHC-CA or CC full can available
E7.4 KHC-CA or CC in sliver break
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 203

Faults
Frequency converter LEDs

Caution
Risk of malfunctions and destruction of 1 2
electronic modules!
Transfer the position of the coding switch
to the new module before you replace a
defective module.
During operation, the operating status of the fre-
quency converter is indicated by a red (1) and a
green (2) light emitting diode. The respective oper-
ating statuses can be seen in the following table.
LEDs
Operating status
red (1) green (2)
off on Enable frequency converter
on on Mains switched on and automatic start blocked
off flashes slowly Frequency converter blocked
off flashes quickly Motor parameters identification is running
flashes quickly off Undervoltage or overvoltage
flashes slowly off Fault active
204 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Faults
RIK module LEDs
1
8
7
6
5
MAT.TRANSP.
2
4
3 SERVICE EIN
RIK6
2 EIN
1 NOT AUS EIN
AUS
POWER STILLSTAND
LED (1) LED (2)
flashing quickly off on off
8 - MAT.TRANSP. -
7 - Key-switch is set to
SERVICE ON
6 Service ON Service OFF
DFK roll rotating DFK roll stopped
5 Safety circuit is
4 EMER- ON active interrupted

Main cylinder ro- Main cylinder
GENCY
3 tating stopped ON active interrupted
STOP
2 Licker-in roll rotat- Licker-in roll OFF interrupted active
1 ing stopped STANDSTILL All drives at a at least one

standstill drive rotating
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 205

Faults
Reversing
You can run the drive for the feed roll on the DFK
tuft feeder and the drive for the feed roll on the card
backwards (= reversing) to remove heavy soiling,
for instance. Service mode
Reversing
M 103 DFK feed unit drive
M 111 Card feed unit drive
1. Activate service mode using the key switch
(see page 208).
2. Select Reversing in service

mode.
3. Select a drive.
Power BAE 6
4. Start the drive

or
reverse in jog mode.
The drive runs in reverse for a certain amount of

time and then stops.
206 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Maintenance
This chapter describes measures which keep the DANGER
machine in or restore it to proper condition. In this Risk of injury from modification work on
operating and service manual servicing, inspection the machine!
and repair work all counts as maintenance. Only carry out modifications to the ma-
chine or its components after consulta-
As owner of the machine, ensure that only qualified
tion with Trützschler after-sales service.
personnel are employed to carry out maintenance
Otherwise major malfunctions may occur
work on the machine.
causing serious personal injury and irrep-
Install and activate all protective and safety instal- arable machine damage.
lations correctly after all maintenance work.
Work on the machine going beyond the operations Servicing
described in the chapter Maintenance may only be
carried out by Trützschler after-sales service per- Servicing work involves periodically repeated
sonnel or by persons authorised by Trützschler. checks of the actual condition of the machine. In
certain circumstances inspection requires mainte-
nance work to be carried out in order to keep the
machine in proper condition at least until the next
inspection.
Inspection intervals
The following table shows recommendations for in-
spection work on the card. The page is a cross ref-
erence to the description of the work.
Inspection interval in hours

Task Page
4000 as required
Check the tension of all belts x 210
Check the pneumatics x 219
Check the motors x 220
Check the drives x 221
Check the valves x 219
Checking the EASYFEED ICFD value x 215
Check the T-CON x 216
Check the clothings x 1) 223

1) The tables for clothing servicing start on page 256.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 207

Maintenance
Service mode
Caution
Risk of malfunctions and destruction of
assembly groups!
Service mode is provided for authorised
service staff only.
Clothing servicing for cylinders, revolving flats and
doffers as well as drives and pneumatic valves can
be carried out in this mode. You can also test the
can changer. You can carry out TC-PFS-M servic-
ing or TC-PFS-M servicing depending on the ma-
chine equipment.
Switching on service mode

1. Open the housing door (1) above the master
switch.
2. Turn the key switch for service mode from the
0 position to the I position.
The symbol for service mode (a hand on a blue
background) appears on the top row of the touch
screen.
You can switch the selected components on and off
using the start and stop keys as described. You can
also use the jog key in order to just quickly test the
components.
To end service mode you must switch the key
switch in the control cabinet back from I to 0.
A range of buttons featuring the symbols of the re-
spective components are to be found on various
pages of the touch screen display, e.g. Motor test
or Test drives. The buttons can show three differ-
ent statuses:
grey: Components available for selection
blue: Component is selected
yellow: Component is in operation
208 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Service menu
The following service menu is displayed once you
have activated service mode with the service key
switch:
Service mode
Service functions
Flats service
Grind cylinder
Reversing
Motor test
– Either select the desired ser-

vice function directly,
– or scroll to the desired service
function.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 209

Maintenance
Checking and setting belt tension

Check the tension of all belts approximately every Notes
4000 operating hours. If necessary, clean the belt before mea-
suring. Strike the belt with your thumb or
The tension of the belt is assessed indirectly from
a blunt object and use the measuring de-
the free running part of the belt's own frequency
vice as described in the manufacturer's
measurement.
instructions.
Carry out the measurement in the middle
of the belt. This is indicated by tips of the
arrows in the following drawings.
If you have fitted a new belt, check the
tension of the belt once more two days
later.
Flat belt
* 1)
* 2) * 3)
76 Hz 53 Hz 88 Hz 53 Hz 81 Hz
Measuring Oscillation frequency

Belt type
point [Hz]
B85-GT6P 168
*1)
F-1 151
B85-GT14P 145
*2)
S-250H 123
B85-GT14P 142
*3)
S-250H 123
210 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Toothed belt for single-motor web doffer and single-roll licker-in
105 Hz 55 Hz
40 Hz 108 Hz 49 Hz
Toothed belt for dual-motor web doffer and triple-roll licker-in
89 Hz
40 Hz 34 Hz 71 Hz 49 Hz 69 Hz
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 211

Maintenance
Setting the belt tension
After replacing a belt or during maintenance work,

you must reset the tension of the belt. Using an ad-
justable tension roller, you can loosen the belts in 1 2 3
order to replace them and set the belt tension.
The respective belt is tensioned by the draw or the
pressure from the tension roller (1). Adjust belt ten-
sion as follows:
1. Unscrew the fixing nut (2).
2. Adjust the belt tension by turning the tension
nut (3).
3. Check the belt tension.
4. Fix the tension roller in place with the fixing
nut (2).
212 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Measuring and setting the tension on the flats transport belt
1 2
5 4 3
1. Remove the left-hand main collector

2. Push the suspension lever (6) into the flat pin
(4) which is in the centre of the setting plate
(2).
3. Attach the spring balance (1) to the suspen-
sion lever.
4. Push a 0.1 mm gauge (5) under the flat pin
and brace it.
5. Pull the spring balance upwards far enough
for allow the gauge to be removed easily.
6. Read the value from the scale dial (7).
The value must be 17 ... 20 N.
7. If necessary, set the belt tension using the
threaded spindles (3) on both sides.
8. Check that the upper flats are horizontal with
a spirit level.
9. If necessary, adjust the position of the flats
with the threaded pins and repeat the measur-
ing process.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 213

Maintenance
Checking the setpoints of the pneumatic connections

You can read the setpoints for the pneumatic con-
nections on the Valve test page on the touch
2
screen (Service mode). Compare the actual val-
ues on the pressure gauges (1 and 2) to the set-
points displayed on this page of the touch screen
with a grey background. The pressure gauges are
situated behind the maintenance door at the front
on the right-hand side in the machine.
1. Activate service mode using the key switch.
2. Scroll to Valve test. 1
3. Press button Y452 and compare the dis-

played value with the value on the upper pres-
sure gauge (2).
4. Press button Y454 and compare the dis-
played value with the value on the lower pres-
sure gauge (1).
The buttons are assigned as follows:

Y310 slide gate (optional)
Y452 Gore gap suction funnel (blowing) Service mode
Valve test
Y453 Webspeed
Y454 Funnel feeler lever (blowing)
Power BAE 6
214 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Checking the ICFD value (EASYFEED)

Note
Service mode
These checks are only necessary if you
Valve test
have changed the position of the feed
plate or have replaced the plunger.
If you wish to check the ICFD value, you must run
the card with no material.
2. Scroll to Valve test.
The setpoint is displayed with a grey background in

Power BAE 6
position (1) on the touch screen. The actual values
are displayed on a white background:
1
ICFD 0.5 mm
In case of deviations from this setpoint value you
must correct the positions of the plungers (2) on the 2
left and right-hand sides of the machine as follows:
3. Unfasten the headless screw (3) and shift the
plunger (2) until the actual value 0.5 mm is
displayed on the touch screen.
Caution
Risk of destroying the plungers. Only
tighten the headless screw lightly to se-
cure it in place. Excessive tightening will
cause the plunger to be crushed.
4. Lightly tighten the headless screw (3) to
secure the plunger.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 215

Maintenance
Checking the T-CON

2. Select Motor test.
3. Press the T-CON button (1). 1

There are two possible causes of the fault:
Fault due to a contact

- Text field Monitoring is red Service mode
Motor test T-CON - Test
- Text field Contact is red
This fault can be triggered even when the cylinder
is still stationary, e. g. by a small piece of wire. In or-
der to eliminate this contact, you have to remove Monitoring
the components of the cylinder one by one until no contact
both text fields switch to a green background.

1. Clean any metal parts from the functional ele-
ments.
2. Check the carding gap and if necessary, set a
larger or more even carding gap.
Fault due to a carbon pin

- Text field Monitoring is red
- Text field Contact is green
1. Replace the carbon pins, see page 217.
The two text fields can be shown in the following
combinations:
Monitoring green
There is no contact - the measuring system in OK.
no contact green
Monitoring red There is no contact - the carbon pin is worn.

no contact green The T-CON electronics are faulty. 1)
Monitoring green
The T-CON electronics are faulty. 1)
Contact red
Monitoring red There is a contact between the cylinder clothing and another element.
You will find instructions on how to remedy this situation in the section
Contact red
Fault due to a contact above.
The T-CON electronics are faulty. 1)
1)
Carry out the T-CON hardware test, see page 218.
216 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Replacing the carbon pin
The T-CON housing is situated on the left-hand

side of the machine on the cylinder axle.
1. Unscrew and remove the supply cable (2) and
the earthing cable (3) on the T-CON unit.
2. Unscrew the three screws (1) on the T-CON 1
housing and remove the housing.
3. Unscrew and remove the used carbon pin (4)

and replace it with a new carbon pin.
4. Screw the T-CON housing in place with the
three screws.
5. Reconnect the supply cable and the earthing
cable on the T-CON unit.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 217

Maintenance
Testing the T-CON hardware

1. Press the T-CON button (1).
2. Start the test by pressing the start key (2). Service mode
Motor test T-CON - Test
The text fields Test (A4:E3.2) and Test (A1:Z9)
must then be displayed with a green background.
In this case the hardware test has been successful.
2 Power BAE 6
The two text fields can be shown in the following 1
combinations:
Test (A4:E3.2) green

The measuring system is OK.
Test (A1:Z9) green
Test (A4:E3.2) green

The T-CON electronics are faulty.
Test (A1:Z9) red
Test (A4:E3.2) red

Test (A1:Z9) green
Test (A4:E3.2) red

Test (A1:Z9) red
Two LEDs (3) and (4) are integrated in the T-CON

housing in addition to the text fields on the touch
screen in order to signal the status of the T-CON
unit. The LED colours have the following signifi-
cance: 3
LED lights up green lights up red

(3) Electric circuit OK Short circuit 4
(4) Carbon pin OK Break on carbon
pin
218 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Checking the valves

On this touch screen you can test all the card's Y310 slide gate (optional)
pneumatic valves and the signal lamp.
Y452 Gore gap suction funnel (blowing)
Y453 Webspeed
Y454 Funnel feeler lever (blowing)
Service mode
Valve test
Power BAE 6
Check the valves as follows: Check the indicator lamp as follows:
1. Scroll in service mode till you 1. Scroll in service mode till you
get to Valve test. get to Valve test.
2. Select valve. 2. Select the colour.
3. Switch on the valve and check 3. Switch on the colour segment

that it is functioning, i.e. com- and check the indicator lamp.
pare the displayed value with
the actual value. 4. Switch off the colour segment.
4. Switch off the valve.

5. Carry out the test for the other colours too.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 219

Maintenance
Checking the motors

To check the sense of rotation you can switch the M 100 Suction fan (optional)
motors on and off if their symbol is displayed on the
T-CON T-CON contact measurement self-test
touch screen. Motors, whose symbols are dis-
(see page XY)
played with an arrow on the left-hand side, can also
be run backwards (reversing). M 144 Doffer's stripper cleaning roll
M 121 Main cylinder
M 131 Flats strips roll
M 102 Opening roll and DFK fan
M 115 The card's opening roll
Service mode
Motor test
Power BAE 6
Check the sense of rotation of the motors as fol- or:

lows:
1. Select Reversing.
2. Select motor reverse.
2. Select motor forwards.
3. Start motor and check sense
3. Start motor. of direction.
4. Stop motor. The drive runs in reverse for a certain amount of

time and then stops.
220 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Checking the drives

Card
You can change the speed of the drives shown on M 103 Tuft feeder feed unit
this touch screen using the buttons in order to
M 111 Card feed unit
check how motors used to convey material are
working together, based on the quality of sliver be- M 142 Doffer (option for TC 5-3)
ing produced.
M 143 Delivery
Service mode
Test drives
Power BAE 6
Check the drives as follows:
1. Scroll to Test drives.
2. Select a drive.
3. Set the speed as a percentage

of the maximum speed.
4. Start the drive and compare

the displayed speed with the
actual value.
5. Stop the drive.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 221

Maintenance
Coiler
You can use the buttons to check the assembly Y 679 Sliver cutter valve
groups displayed on the touch screen.
M 174 Deposit drive
M 182 Turnstile drive
M 185 Rotary can plate drive
Service mode
Coiler
Power BAE 6
Check that the assembly groups are functioning as

follows:
1. Scroll to Coiler.
2. Select the assembly group.
3. Activate the assembly group.
4. Deactivate the assembly

group.
222 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Checking the clothings

In the following you will see illustrated examples of
the card's clothings which are to help you judge the
clothings.
Condition of the flats clothing

With a magnifying glass with a strength of 30x or
more and a little experience, you can judge the 1
condition of a clothing.
New clothing tip with sharp wire tip and defined
ground section (1):
Worn clothing tip with clearly rounded wire tip:
Reground clothing tip with sharp wire tip:
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 223

Maintenance
Condition of the main cylinder clothing

New clothing tips:
The clothing tip is worn and rounded, the wire tip is

more or less polished. Grinding grooves, as appear
in the next illustration, cannot be seen. The working
edge on the front of the wire is rounded.
The grinding grooves from the grinding stone can

clearly be seen on the re-sharpened edge of the
wire. The working edge on the front of the wire is
sharp-edged.
224 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Condition of the doffer clothing

New clothing tip:
The clothing tip is worn and rounded. The tip sur-

face is polished, grinding grooves can no longer be
seen so that on the doffer, fibres are not transferred
and the web is not held as effectively.
Grinding grooves can be seen over the entire sur-

face of the sharpened clothing tip.
The important ground brow (1) is formed by grind-
ing in the opposite direction to the working direction
of the clothing.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 225

Maintenance
Condition of the licker-in clothing

Wire tip of a new licker-in clothing:
Wire tip of a worn licker-in clothing:

The marks on the wire's leading edge are clearly
recognisable in comparison with the rear edge of
the wire. In some cases the wire tip in the upper
area can also become detached.
Note
Worn licker-in clothings are replaced and
not re-ground.
226 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Condition of the carding strip on the licker-in

The wire of a new clothing:
The wire of a worn clothing:

Here too the marks on the wire's leading edge are
clearly recognisable in comparison with the rear
edge of the wire:
Note
Worn carding strips are replaced and not
re-ground.
Condition of fixed flats clothings

The wire of a new clothing:
The marks on the lead edge on the worn wire and

the roundedness of the wire tip are clearly visible:
Note
Worn fixed flats clothings are replaced
and not re-ground.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 227

Maintenance
Maintenance
The maintenance work carried out on the card General cleaning instructions
should make sure that the machine is kept in prop- Adhere to the following basic cleaning instructions:
er condition for as long as possible.
Caution
DANGER Possible destruction of surfaces!
Risk of injury from drives, rotating parts Do not use cleaning agents or any other
and belts! additives for cleaning purposes.
Switch the machine off before carrying
out maintenance work. Do not start any – Allow the main cylinder to run for approxi-
maintenance work until the machine has mately 10 minutes after switching off the
been disconnected from the power sup- material transport in order to run the flats area
ply and all rolls have come to a standstill. to empty.
Secure the master switch in the OFF po- – Vacuum off any fibre fly, preferably using and
sition by means of a padlock and a warn- industrial vacuum cleaner, so that the dirt can-
ing sign or by other suitable means to not be spread.
prevent unauthorised switching on.
– For metal surfaces use a plastic scouring pad
DANGER or a soft brass brush.
Possible serious injuries from drives, ro- – You can wipe plastic and ceramics with a
tating parts and belts! damp cloth.
Some maintenance work has to be car-
ried out with the drives running. – Remove fibres, coatings and abrasion from
Make sure that nobody is situated in the toothed wheels and toothed belts with a soft
dangerous areas of the machine. brass brush as required. Transport the
Wear close-fitting clothing and keep it toothed belts further by hand as necessary.
– Clean pipes with a suitable, flexible brush
without a metal centre or draw a long cloth
with a suitable knot through the pipes.
– Clean soiled aluminium surfaces of flaps and
hoods with a cleaning cloth and warm water.
Dry the cleaned surfaces afterwards thor-
oughly with a dry cloth, otherwise the material
will corrode.
– Open doors which are electrically locked
before you switch off and secure the master
switch.
228 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Maintenance and cleaning schedule

The following table shows recommendations for Note
maintenance depending on the operating hours of For materials with a high content of adhe-
the card. The number (No.) indicates the assembly sive substances or with a high level of
group of the machine on which maintenance work soiling, the 120 hour interval is reduced
is carried out. The page is a cross reference to the to 24 hours.
description of the work. Examples:
Recycled material, flax and staple
lengths < 7 mm and > 60 mm
Frequency in hours
No. Task Page
120 2000 8000
– Clean all suction hoods x 230
1 Clean tuft feeder x 232
2 Clean feed table x 237
3 Clean flat strips roll x 239
4 Clean revolving flats area x 241
6 Clean doffer section x 242
8 Clean the web doffing section x 245
5 Covers of the cylinder, cleaning x 248
7 Clean the web doffer channel connector x 249
– Replace the delivery rolls belt x 246
– TC-FB filter box (optional) 253
– TC-TS transverse web delivery belt (optional) 254
2 3 4
7
1
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 229

Maintenance
Cleaning all suction hoods
1. Switch off the material transport and all

drives. Switch off the master switch and lock it
with a padlock to prevent it from being
switched back on.
2. Check the transparent suction ducts (1) on
the left-hand side of the machine for internal
build-up of fibres.
3. If the suction ducts are soiled, remove the
suction ducts from the connecting sockets,
vacuum and wipe out with a damp cloth.
4. Rub the suction ducts dry internally or leave to
dry.
230 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
5. Vacuum suction hoods and wipe out the entire

interior surface with a damp cloth.
6. Rub the dampened surfaces dry or leave to
dry.
7. Fit the suction ducts back on.
Example of a suction hoods with connecting sock-
ets on the left-hand side of the machine:
8. Remove / unscrew the suction ducts on the

right-hand side of the machine too and wipe
out with a damp cloth.
9. Replace / screw back on all suction ducts.
Example of a screw-fitted suction duct on the right-
hand side of the machine:
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 231

Maintenance
Cleaning the DFK tuft feeder

Upper trunk
1. Switch off the material transport and all drives.
Open all electrically locked doors and flaps. 1
Switch off the master switch and secure to
prevent it from being switched back on using
a padlock. 2
2. Open the upper housing cover on the tuft
feeder upwards.
3. Clean air outlet openings (1, 2 and 3) on the
upper trunk.
The air outlet is either fitted with an adjustable 3
sheet-metal insert (2) or a needle comb (3) de-
pending on the model.
4. Using the snap locks (4 and 5), open the per-

forated plate downwards.
5. Vacuum the perforated plate.
6. Vacuum clean the trunk to the feed roll from
above.
7. Close the perforated plate so that it clicks into
place in the snap locks.
Note
Instructions for settings for the transport
air outlet filter can be found on page 108.
4 5
8. Remove the air hoses on both sides of the

fan. 6 7
9. Pull both spring-loaded stop bolts (6 and 7)

and raise the housing flap together with the
fan.
The flap is held in the upper position by pneu-
matic springs.
10. Check the transparent fan's connecting hous-
ing and the fan blades for soiling - If neces-
sary, unscrew the housing and remove fibres
and sticky deposits.
232 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
11. Check the feed roll (1) for soiling and vacuum
clean off any fibre deposits. Pay particular
attention to the areas between the roll ends
and the walls of the housing. 1
12. Remove soiling within the blow trunk (2) by

vacuuming or wiping with a damp cloth.
13. Afterwards rub aluminium surfaces dry.
Lower trunk
1. Remove hoses (3 and 4) from the WEBFEED
waste collectors.
2. Undo both knurled screws (5) on the service
flap of the lower trunk and place the flap on 3
the control cabinet.
3. Check the lower trunk for fibre build-up and
sticky deposits and remove any soiling within
the trunk with a vacuum cleaner.
5 4
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 233

Maintenance
Caution
Risk of destroying the pressure sensor!
Do not blow out the lower trunk with com-
pressed air!
4. If the inside of the pressure hose is soiled,
remove the hose from the pressure sensor (1)
1
and blow out in the direction of the lower
trunk.
5. Connect hoses to the EASYFEED waste col-
lectors, direct them backwards and place
them on the control cabinet.
Clean the lower trunk
Note
This maintenance work only has to be
carried out every 500 operating hours.
The hoses are disconnected from the fan and the 2
EASYFEED, the fan has been raised, the service
flap of the lower trunk is locked.
1. Unfasten the knurled screws (2) on the left
and right of the lower trunk and shift them
both outwards (3).
234 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
2. Hold the filter trunk firmly in place above and

unlock on both sides using the stop bolts (1) 1
and place the trunk on the control cabinet.
3. Vacuum the front side (2) of the trunk.
4. Lift the complete trunk backwards out of the

housing and place it on the control cabinet.
5. Vacuum connecting surfaces (3) and wipe 3
with a damp cloth.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 235

Maintenance
6. Then allow the lower trunk to glide into the

retainer section (2) with the bearing studs (1).
1
7. Raise the lower trunk and allow the stop bolts

(3) to snap into place on both sides.
8. Shift the knurled screws (4) on the left and

right into the groove on the housing of the
4
lower trunk and screw them in place.
9. Lower the fan. Connect the hoses to the sock-
ets on the WEBFEED and the fan.
236 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Opening roll, cleaning

1. Unfasten the fastening screws (1) on both
sides of the service flap.
DANGER
Risk of injury from the sharp needles on
the opening roll.
Use protective gloves for cleaning the
area around the opening roll.
2. Lower the opening roll service flap (3).
3. Take particular care to remove twists of fibre,
2
fibre build-up and sticky deposits from the
opening roll near to the walls of the housing
(2).
4. Wipe the inside of the service flap with a 3
damp cloth and rub dry.
5. Then raise the flap and lock in place with two
screws.
Cleaning the comb boxes in the feed

table
Note
The material transport has to be switched
off to carry out this work - the cylinder can
be allowed to continue to run.
1. Press the stop key to bring the material trans-
port to a halt.
2. Open the safety locking bar as far as it will go.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 237

Maintenance
3. Release the hook (1) on the handle of the suc-

tion hood.
1
4. Pull the suction hood and comb box upwards.

2
5. Allow the suction hood to lower at the back
and snap into place.
6. Check both combs (2 and 3) for residue and
sticky deposits.
7. Remove any loose tuft material. Wipe all fibre
carrying areas with a damp cloth.
8. Pull the stop bolt (4) to unlock the suction

hood and the comb box.
238 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
9. Pull the suction hood and comb box back into

1
the operating position and allow the hook (1)
on the handle of the suction hood to engage.
10. Pivot the safety locking bar back into the initial
position so that it snaps into position in the
safety switch (2). 2
Cleaning the flat strips roll

prevent it from being switched back on using 4
a padlock.
2. Unlock the stop bolt (4) on the left-hand side
of the machine and open the suction hood (3)
on the flats cleaning unit.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 239

Maintenance
3. Vacuum away any fibre build-up in the suction

hood (1) and wipe with a damp cloth to
remove sticky deposits; then rub the alumin-
ium surfaces dry.
4. Close the suction hood and allow the stop bolt
to engage.
5. Open the service flap (2) to the slow-running

flat strips roll. 2
6. Check the flats strips roll (3) for deposits of

fibres and vacuum clean as necessary.
7. Close the service flap.
240 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Cleaning revolving flats area

Open all electrically locked doors and flaps.
1
a padlock.
2. Check the entire interior area (1) of the revolv-
ing flat for fibre build-up and vacuum clean.
3. Vacuum the rubber flats cover (3). In case of

heavy soiling, unscrew it, fold it up and 3 4
remove it from the interior area of the flat.
4. Wipe down the rubber flat cover.
5. Clean the area around the drive axis (2) par-
ticularly thoroughly.
6. If necessary, unfasten the flats cover on both
sides of the machine with the screws (4),
remove it from the flats area and wipe off with 2
a damp cloth.
7. Comb out the cup brush (5).
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 241

Maintenance
Cleaning the doffer section
Clean the clothing
DANGER
Possible serious injury from rotating
doffer!
Do not use the doffer clothing to hold on
to. For cleaning purposes, use a hand-
held scraper with a brass clothing only.
1. Activate service mode using the key switch
(see page 208).
1
2. Open the upper service flap (1) on the doffer
and check for build-up of fibres; wipe off sticky
deposits with a damp cloth and then rub dry.
3. Select Motor test in service

mode.
4. Scroll to Test drives.
5. Select the doffer drive.
6. Start drive motors.
7. Increase the drive speed to

approximately 50 % of the
nominal value.
8. Remove foreign bodies using a handheld

brass scraper.
9. To do so, hold the hand-held scraper flat on
one of the roll ends for approximately two roll
revolutions. Move the hand-held scraper step
by step until you reach the opposite end of the
roll.
10. Press the stop key.
11. Close the service flap on the doffer.
12. Deactivate service mode using the key
switch.
242 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Cleaning the lower cover sections
Note
This work is due to be carried out approx-
imately every 500 working hours.
a padlock.
2. Unfasten and remove the wing screws on the
cover plates (1).
Caution
Possible damages to the clothing!
Always work in pairs when disassembling
and assembling the cover sections. Oth-
erwise the edge of a cover section may
damage the clothing.
3. Working as a pair, unscrew the rear cover
sections (2) below the doffer on both sides of
the machine.
4. Wipe off the insides of the cover sections with
a damp cloth and rub dry.
5. Vacuum the accessible areas of the doffer
2
clothing.
6. Working as a pair, unscrew each of the front

cover sections (3) below the doffer on both
sides of the machine.
7. Wipe off the insides of the sections and all
fibre carrying areas with a damp cloth and rub
dry.
Note
To remove the upper cover section, you
must remove the card's front panel and
the front waste funnel:
3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 243

Maintenance
8. Remove the card's front cover plate.
9. Pull out the stop bolts (1) to unlock the

mounts.
10. Remove the waste funnel towards the front,
remove soiling and wipe with a damp cloth.
Caution
Possible damages to the clothing!
slightly damage the clothing.
11. Unscrew and remove the nuts (2) from the
upper front cover section below the doffer and
remove the cover section. 2
12. Wipe the insides of the cover section with a
damp cloth and vacuum clean the accessible
areas of the doffer clothing.
13. Rub the cleaned cover section dry, screw it
back on, insert the collecting funnel and
secure the front panel.
14. Replace the cover plates on both sides of the
machine and secure using the wing screws.
244 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Cleaning the web doffing section

1
DANGER
When the cover flap is open, long hair or
loose items of clothing may become en-
tangled in the rotating rolls.
2. Open the spoiler section (1) outwards, vac-
uum clean, wipe with a damp cloth and rub
dry.
3. Close the spoiler section so it is back in the
initial position.
4. Open the WEBSPEED (2) by pressing the

button.
5. Thoroughly remove all fibre material from the

interior of the WEBSPEED.
6. Wipe off the components which come into
contact with the web using a damp cloth and
then rub dry.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 245

Maintenance
7. Open up the measuring funnel using the hand

lever (3). 2 3
8. Remove any twists or other deposits of fibres 1
from the delivery rolls (1).
9. Vacuum clean the end of the measuring fun-
nel and remove stubborn soiling.
10. Vacuum clean the pinion, toothed belts and

adjoining areas (4).
11. Lower the measuring funnel, push the WEB-
SPEED down until the lock clicks in place.
Replacing the delivery rolls belt

1. Unfasten the locking screw (1) for the tension
roller (3) and the adjusting screw (2) to take 2
the load off the toothed belt.
2. Remove the belt and fit a new belt to the deliv- 1
ery rolls.
3. Set the belt tension as stipulated (see
page 211) with the adjusting screw (2) and
secure in place with the locking screw (1).
246 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Guiding profile, cleaning

a padlock.
2. Unfasten the guiding profile (2) on the left-
hand side of the machine using the screw 1
handle (1).
3. Pull the guiding profile (3) horizontally out of

the card.
4. Vacuum clean the edges.
3
5. Wipe all surfaces which come into contact to
the material with a damp cloth and rub dry.
6. Then shift the guiding profile as far as it will go
into the card and secure using the screw han-
dle.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 247

Maintenance
Cleaning the main cylinder covers

a padlock.
2. Remove both lower suction ducts (3) and the
suction hose (2) from the main collector (1).
Caution
Risk of damage to the clothing!
slightly damage the clothing.
3
2
Note
Mark the cover sections with consecutive
numbers so that you can keep them in
the same order when re-installing.
3. Working as a pair, unscrew each of the cover
sections (4) below the main cylinder on both
4. To remove the front cover sections on both
sides of the machine, unscrew the plate (5).
5. Wipe off the insides of the sections and all
fibre carrying areas with a damp cloth.
6. Replace the cleaned sections, screw on the
cover plate (5) and attach both lower suction 4 5
ducts (3) and the suction hose (2) to the main
collector.
248 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Cleaning the channel connector

The card is switched off at the master switch and
secured to prevent it from being switched back on.
1. Open the front housing doors and open the
front flap upwards.
2. Unfasten the fastening screws (1 and 2) on

the left and right-hand front sections of hous-
ing.
3. Open the front sections of housing forwards.

Beware of the pneumatic hoses when handling
the right-hand section of housing.
4. Disconnect all the suction ducts.
5. Remove the holder for the suction hood (3).
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 249

Maintenance
6. Unscrew and remove the four screws (1) on

the upper section of housing. 1
7. Working as a pair with another person, lift off
the upper section of housing and place it
down.
8. Unfasten the motor base plate (3) and remove

the drive belt (2) from the cleaning roll. 2 3
9. Mark the radial position of the cleaning roll on

both sides of the machine with a felt pen (4)
and unscrew and remove the bottom screw
(5) from the fastening plate.
10. Carefully lift out and put aside the cleaning
roll.
250 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
11. Unscrew and remove the supports (1) for the

suction hoods on both sides of the machine.
1
12. Unscrew and remove the four screws (2) on

the channel connector on both sides.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 251

Maintenance
13. Gradually pull out the channel connector (1),

making sure not to tilt it.
Caution
Risk of damage to the stripper roll!
Avoid contact with the stripper roll and
1
clean the clothing on the stripper roll with
compressed air only. A steel brush will
cause scratches on the electrolyte pol-
ished clothing, which in turn may cause
lapping on the roll.
14. Brush off any material build-up from the profile

by hand. Clean the surfaces with a cleaning
cloth and water and then rub them dry.
15. Rub the surfaces of the profile which come
into contact with the material, with talcum
powder.
Caution
Possible damage to assembly groups in
the doffer section!
When assembling adhere to the stipulat-
ed gap dimensions in the Settings chap-
ter on page 119.
16. Re-insert the channel connector and re-
assemble the web doffer in reverse order.
252 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Cleaning the TC-FB filter box

The optional TC-FB filter box is a separate filter unit
which can be fitted with intermittent waste suction
or with a manual waste removal system. With the 2
manual version the filter box must be checked and
manually emptied at intervals of 5 ... 20 minutes de-
pending on the rate of production. The version with
mechanical suction has the additional suction pipe
(2).
Proceed as follows to empty manually:
1. Open the lock (3) on the triangular door with a 1
3
square and open the door by the handle (1)
firmly.
2. Brush the diagonally positioned filter plate
with the hand and remove the material within
15 seconds - the card's material transport will
switch off after 15 seconds.
After a period of one year you must check the fan
wheel and the regulating flap in the fan and remove 4
any deposits of material:
3. Run the card to empty and switch off the card

at the master switch.
8
DANGER
Risk of crushing the hand on rotating im-
peller wheel.
The fan's impeller wheel continues to ro-
tate even after the power has been
switched off. Wait a few minutes before 7
opening the filter box.
4. Unscrew and remove the triangular plate (4).
5. Check that the regulator plate can move freely
(5) and clean it.
6. Unscrew and open the left-hand door of the
filter box.
7. Blow the impeller wheel clean with a com-
pressed air hose through the cleaning hole 6 5
(6).
8. Re-fit the triangular plate.
For more extensive cleaning work you can remove
the exhaust air duct (8) by unfastening the screws
(7) and removing the exhaust air duct from the filter
box towards the front.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 253

Maintenance
Servicing the TC-TS transverse web delivery belt

The optional TC-TS transverse web delivery belt is
designed especially for processing short-staple
material and is a replacement for the WEBSPEED.
1 2 3
Frequency in hours
No. Task
170 4000 8000
2 Clean material residue from the round belt drive. x
1, 4 Clean residue material from the outside of the transverse web

x
delivery belt.
1 Clean residue material from all support rollers for transverse

x
belts.
- Check the round belt for wear and replace it as necessary (see
x
table Expendable parts starting on page 317).
4 Check the transverse belts for wear and replace them as neces-
x
sary (see table Expendable parts starting on page 317).
3 Check the drive belts for wear and replace as necessary. x
254 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Maintenance
Repair work on the card is performed to restore the Note
machine to its proper condition. You can only achieve the highest sliver
quality if you adhere to the recommended
DANGER service intervals. Depending on the appli-
Risk of injury from drives, rotating parts cation you can extend the service inter-
and belts! vals and replacement intervals for cloth-
Switch the machine off before carrying ings. Contact the TCC after-sales service
out maintenance and repair work. Do not department for information on the ideal
start any maintenance or repair work until solution for your production environment.
the machine has been disconnected from
Contact:
the power supply and all rolls have come
Trützschler Card Clothing GmbH
to a standstill.
Rosenstraße 7-9
Secure the master switch in the off posi-
D-75387 Neubulach
tion using a padlock and a warning sign
Telephone +49 7053 68-0
to prevent it from being switched back on.
Fax +49 7053 7359
Make sure that nobody is situated in the
e-mail cardclothing@truetzschler.de
dangerous areas of the machine.
Internet www.cardclothing.de
Caution
When re-starting, material left caught in Note
the machine can call serious damage. Al- When grinding cylinder clothings and
low the main cylinder to run for approxi- doffer clothings, one passage is the
mately 10 minutes after switching off the movement of the transversing grindstone
material transport in order to run the flats from one edge of the clothing to the other,
area to empty. and back again.
Grinding clothings Caution

Risk of malfunctions and destruction of
In order to ensure the quality of the product, the clothings!
clothings have to be conditioned after a certain Only the following clothings may be
amount of material has been processed. ground on the card:
Cylinder and doffer clothings are sharpened using – Cylinder clothing
the TC-GD traverse grinding device. The TC-FG
grinding device, which is fitted with a rotating grind- – Revolving flat clothing
ing roll, is used to grind the flats clothing. The grind- – Doffer clothing
ing roll is fitted with a coarse-grained grinding belt.
All other clothings must be replaced by new ones.
Information on the following tables The following tables show recommendations for
All the specifications in the table are recommenda- grinding the card clothings depending on the mate-
tions. You can only determine the correct time for rial processed by the card. The number (No.) indi-
grinding by using a clothing magnifying glass. Use cates the position of the roll in the machine.
the clothing magnifying glass both before and after
grinding in order to determine the exact number of
passages over the cylinder clothings and doffer
clothing, and the correct number of revolutions
when grinding the flats clothings.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 255

Maintenance
Recommended service intervals for standard clothings
Recommended service intervals for 100 % combed cotton (standard clothings)
Note
Spun-dyed or matted fibres can consider-
ably shorten the operational life of the Sliver quality
clothing. high
The intervals are valid for standard cloth-
ings only.
The markings ("x" and "o") indicate the type of
clothing service required after the amount of pro-
cessed material has been reached in each case: low
70 140 210 280 350 70 140 [t]
"x" means grind the clothing
"o" means replace the clothing
Standard clothing Material processed in tonnes

No.
Cotton 70 140 210 280 350 700 1800 3200
Cylinder x x x x o 6
Revolving flat x x x x o 7
1. Twin-top cassette o o o o o 2
Doffer x o 11
Pre-carding area fixed flats o o 3
Post-carding area fixed flats o 8
Licker-in 1 o*) o**) 14
Licker-in 2 +) o 13
Carding segments o 12
Licker-in 3 +) o 1
Flats stripping roll o 4
Flat strips roll o 5
Stripper cleaning roll o 9
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16
o*) = Clothing licker-in

o**) = Needle licker-in
+) = only available on models with a 3-roll licker-in
256 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
Number of Number of passages

activations Cylinder clothing Doffer clothing
1 5 … 10 2
2 10 … 25 2
3 25 … 35 3
4 35 … 50 3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 257

Maintenance
Recommended service intervals for 100 % carded cotton or a tuft mixture of cotton and synthetic
fibres (standard clothings)
Note
clothing. high
ings only.
90 180 260 340 410 470 530 590 90 [t]

No.
Cotton and blends 90 180 260 340 410 470 530 590 1800 2700
1. Twin-top cassette o o o o o o o o 2
Revolving flat x x x o 7
Cylinder x x x o 6
Doffer x x x o 11
Pre-carding area fixed flats o o o o 3
Post-carding area fixed flats o o 8
Licker-in 1 o *) o*) o**) 14
Licker-in 2 +) o 13
Licker-in 3 +) o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16

o**) = needle licker-in (100 % cotton)
258 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10

1 5 … 15 2
2 15 … 50 2
3 50 … 100 3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 259

Maintenance
Recommended service intervals for 100 % polyacrylic or 100 % viscose, shiny (standard clothings)
Note
clothing. high
ings only.
100 190 280 370 450 520 590 650 100 [t]

No.
Polyacrylic or viscose 100 190 280 370 450 520 590 650 2000 3000
Cylinder x x x o 6
Doffer x x x o 11
Licker-in 1 o*) o*) o**) 14
Licker-in 2 +) o 13
Licker-in 3 +) o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16

260 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10

1 5 … 15 2
2 15 … 50 2
3 50 … 100 3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 261

Maintenance
Recommended service intervals for 100 % polyester (standard clothings)
Note
clothing. high
ings only.
80 150 220 280 340 390 440 490 80 [t]

No.
Polyester 80 150 220 280 340 390 440 490 2300 3000
Cylinder x x x o 6
Doffer x x x o 11
Licker-in 1 o *) o*) o**) 14
Licker-in 2 +) o 13
Licker-in 3 +) o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16

262 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10

1 5 … 15 2
2 15 … 50 2
3 50 … 100 3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 263

Maintenance
Recommended service intervals for long-life clothings
Recommended service intervals for 100 % combed cotton (long-life clothings)
Note
clothing. high
The intervals are valid for long-life cloth-
ings only.
110 220 320 430 540 110 220 [t]
Long-life clothings Material processed in tonnes

No.
Cotton 110 220 320 430 540 1080 2200 3800
Cylinder x x x x o 6
Revolving flat x x x x o 7
1. Twin-top cassette o o o o o 2
Doffer x o 11
Pre-carding area fixed flats o o 3
Post-carding area fixed flats o 8
Licker-in 1 o*) o**) 14
Licker-in 2 +) o 13
Licker-in 3 +) o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16

264 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10

1 5 … 10 2
2 10 … 25 2
3 25 … 35 3
4 35 … 50 3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 265

Maintenance
Recommended service intervals for 100 % carded cotton or a tuft mixture of cotton and synthetic
fibres (long-life clothings)
Note
clothing. high
ings only.
170 330 480 610 770 880 990 1100 170 [t]

No.
Cotton and blends 170 330 480 610 770 880 990 1100 2200 3300
Revolving flat x x x o x x x o 7
Cylinder x x x o 6
Doffer x x x o 11
Licker-in 1 o *) o*) o**) 14
Licker-in 2 +) o 13
Licker-in 3 +) o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16

266 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10

1 5 … 15 2
2 15 … 50 2
3 50 … 100 3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 267

Maintenance
Recommended service intervals for 100 % polyacrylic or 100 % viscose, shiny (long-life clothings)
Note
clothing. high
ings only.
190 360 520 670 840 960 1080 1200 190 [t]

No.
Polyacrylic or viscose 190 360 520 670 840 960 1080 1200 2400 3600
Cylinder x x x o 6
Doffer x x x o 11
Licker-in 1 o *) o*) o**) 14
Licker-in 2 +) o 13
Licker-in 3 +) o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16

268 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10

1 5 … 15 2
2 15 … 50 2
3 50 … 100 3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 269

Maintenance
Recommended service intervals for 100 % polyester (long-life clothings)
Note
clothing. high
ings only.
140 270 390 500 630 720 810 900 140 [t]

No.
Polyester 140 270 390 500 630 720 810 900 2700 3600
Cylinder x x x o 6
Doffer x x x o 11
Licker-in 1 o *) o*) o**) 14
Licker-in 2 +) o 13
Licker-in 3 +) o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16

270 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10

1 5 … 15 2
2 15 … 50 2
3 50 … 100 3
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 271

Maintenance
Grinding clothings
Before you grind a clothing, assess the condition of Grinding the cylinder clothing
the tips with a magnifying glass. This is the only To grind the cylinder clothing, use the TC-GD grind-
way in which you can what percentage of the tips ing device. Depending on the condition of the cloth-
has been achieved by the grinding stone after ing you can grind the main cylinder clothing up to
grinding. The result of this test also affects the four times. The number of passages also depends
number of planned passages. When grinding cylin- on the number of times grinding has already been
der clothings and doffer clothings, one passage is performed:
the movement of the transversing grindstone from
one edge of the clothing to the other, and back
again. Number of Number of passages
activations combed other
DANGER
Possible serious injury from rotating cyl- 1 5 … 10 5 … 15
inder clothing!
Make sure that the card is switched off 2 10 … 15 15 … 50
and the cylinder is at a standstill before 3 25 … 35 50 … 100
you remove carding elements and the
cover sections. Secure the card to pre- 4 35 … 50 –
vent it from being switched back on.
Caution
DANGER Risk of malfunctions and destruction of
Possible serious injury from rotating clothings!
grinding roll! Clothings must only be fitted and ground
Wear close-fitting clothing and keep it by qualified specialists. Only those grind-
buttoned and tucked in at all times. Staff ing devices which have been provided
with long hair must wear a hair net. especially for individual clothings must be
Always wear protective goggles when used for grinding.
carrying out grinding work.
Caution
Make sure that nobody is next to the card Possible damage to the clothing and
during the grinding process. grinding device!
Pay attention to the following instructions before re- Make sure that the following work has
grinding clothings. been performed before you attach the
grinding device:
Caution – Run the material transport until all the material
Risk of malfunctions and destruction of has been conveyed out of the card.
clothings!
Only the following clothings may be – Clean any build-up of fibres and soiling from
ground on the card: the fitting area of the main cylinder.
– Main cylinder clothing – Remove only the fixed flat and cover sections
which need to be removed for the grinding
– Revolving flat clothing process.
– Doffer clothing
All other clothings must be replaced by
new ones.
272 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Fitting the TC-GD grinding device
DANGER
Possible serious injury from rotating cyl-
inder clothing!
Make sure that the card is switched off
and the cylinder is at a standstill before
you remove carding elements and the
cover sections. Secure the card to pre-
vent it from being switched back on.
Note
Also read and follow the separate operat-
ing instructions for the grinding device. 1
The figure opposite shows the position of the right-
hand grinding device holder on the main cylinder to
help with orientation.

1. Remove the third, fourth and fifth fixed flats (1)
or cover sections (2) from the pre-carding
area.
2
2. Shift the rubber seal (3) to the side and fix it in

place.
3. Unscrew the screw (5) and remove the insert
plate (4).
3
5
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 273

Maintenance
4. Screw the holders (1) for the grinding device

on the left and right to the side plates on the
main cylinder.
1
Note
The respective drilled holes on the hold-
ers for fitting the grinding device to the
side plate on the main cylinder are
marked "Left" and "Right" and "1 = Cylin-
der".
5. Fasten both positioning slides to the holders 2
using the knurled screws (2).
6. Pull back the grinding coupling (6) so that the

grinding stone does not touch the clothing.
7. Working as a pair, place the grinding device
on the holders with the grinding head facing
3
the clothing. Position the grinding device so
that the grinding stone can travel and even
distance beyond both edges. 6
Note 4
The grinding stone must not travel more
than 1/3 of its width beyond the clothing.
This prevents the stone from tilting.
5
8. Screw the grinding stone in place on the posi-
tioning slides from below using wing screws
(5).
9. Use the knurled screws (3) and dial to set the
withdrawn grinding stone to 4 mm parallel to
the main cylinder clothing.
10. Shift the inductive proximity switch (9) and the

spacer bar to set the path of the grinding 7
stone so that the grinding stone can travel
evenly over the edges of the clothing.
11. Cover the exposed clothing area with the yel-
low protective cover (7).
12. Connect the power cables and data cables of
the control device to the connection sockets
(8) on the grinding device. 8
274 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
13. Connect the control device to the mains.

14. Set the rotary switch (1) to "Cylinder". 1
15. Switch on the control device using the switch
(2).
Caution
Make sure that the gap between the
grinding stone and the clothing is 4 mm
across the entire width.
Make sure that all tools have been re- 3
moved and tidied away. 2
16. Switch on the card and activate service mode.
DANGER
Risk of crushing for fingers and hands!
Limbs may become entangled in the ro-
tating cylinder.
Make sure that nobody is to the left or
right of the card during the grinding pro-
cess.
Note
The maximum speed of the cylinder is
575 rpm. If the speed exceeds this limit, a
fault message is shown and the cylinder
is switched off.
Frequency Revolutions Ø pulley

[Hz] [rpm] [mm]
50 135 … 210
350 … 560
60 110 … 175
Note
Cards with adjustable cylinder speeds
are run at 520 rpm for the duration of the
grinding process.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 275

Maintenance
17. Select Grinding Cylinder in

service mode.
Service mode
18. Select Grind with TC-GD.
Grind cylinder
Grind with TC-GD

19. Start the main cylinder.
Grinding cylinder
reversing
20. Check the TC-PFS-M flats gap and confirm

the warning.
The main cylinder builds up to operating speed.
21. Switch on the grinding device by pressing the
START key (3) and wait until the grinding
Power BAE 6
stone has arrived on the left-hand side of the
machine.
22. Move the grinding stone into the grinding posi-
tion using the grinding coupling - sparks fly.
23. Allow the desired number of passages to be
carried out.
24. Disengage the grinding stone in the final posi-
tion and switch off the control device at the
switch (2).
25. Stop the main cylinder.
26. Switch the card off and secure it against

switching back on.
27. Check the grinding result on the main cylinder
clothing with a magnifying glass and allow the
grinding machine to make more passages
using the same setting as necessary.
28. Then remove the grinding device and mea-
sure the gap between the strips with clothing
and the main cylinder clothing.
29. If necessary, re-adjust the twin-top cassettes
(see the section starting on page 293).
30. Fit all fixed flats and cover sections which
have been removed on the main cylinder
again.
31. Check the settings of the fixed flats and cover
sections and adjust as necessary.
32. Check the revolving flats.
276 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Grinding the doffer clothing

To grind the doffer clothing, use the TC-GD grind-
ing device. When activating the doffer clothing only
carry out one or two passages per grinding pro-
cess.
DANGER
Risk of crushing for fingers and hands!
Limbs may become entangled in the ro-
tating doffer roll.
Make sure that the card is switched off
and the doffer is at a standstill before you
remove service flap (1). Secure the card
to prevent it from being switched back on.
Caution
Possible damage to the clothing and
grinding device!
Make sure that the following work has 1
been performed before you attach the
grinding device:
– Run the material transport until all the material
has been conveyed out of the card.
– Clean any build-up of fibres and soiling from
the fitting area of the doffer.
1. Screw the holders (2) for the grinding device

on the left and right to the side plates on the
doffer.
Note
The respective drilled holes on the hold-
ers for fitting the grinding device to the
side plate on the doffer are marked "Left"
and "Right" and "2 = doffer".
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 277

Maintenance
2. Fasten both positioning slides (1) to the hold-

ers using the knurled screws (2). 1
3. Pull back the grinding coupling so that the

3 4 5
grinding stone does not touch the clothing.
4. Working as pair, position the grinding device
(5) on the holder with the grinding head facing
the clothing and screw in place on the posi-
tioning slides with wing screws (4).
5. Use the knurled screws (3) and dial to set the
withdrawn grinding stone to 4 mm parallel to
the doffer clothing.
6. Shift the inductive proximity switch (6) and the

spacer bar (7) to set the path of the grinding
stone so that the grinding stone can travel 7
6
evenly over the edges of the clothing.
Note
The grinding stone must not travel more
than 1/3 of its width beyond the clothing.
This prevents the stone from tilting.
7. Connect the power cables and data cables of
the control device to the connection sockets
(8) on the grinding device.
8
8. Connect the control device to the mains.
278 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
9. Set the rotary switch (1) on the control device

to "Doffer".
1
10. Switch on the control device using the switch
(2).
Caution
Make sure that the gap between the
grinding stone and the clothing is 4 mm
across the entire width.
Make sure that all tools have been re- 3
moved and tidied away.
2
DANGER
Fingers may become entangled in the ro-
tating doffer roll.
right of the card during the grinding pro-
cess.
11. Switch on the card and activate service mode.
12. Select Grinding Cylinder in

service mode.
13. Scroll to Grinding doffer.
Service mode
14. Select Grinding with TC-GD.
Grinding doffer
Grinding with TC-GD

15. Start the doffer.
Sharpen with cylinder
The doffer builds up to the setpoint speed.

16. Switch on the grinding device by pressing the
START key (3) and wait until the grinding
stone has arrived on the right-hand side of the
machine.
17. Move the grinding stone into the grinding posi- Power BAE 6
tion using the grinding coupling - sparks fly.

18. Allow one or two passages to be carried out.
19. Disengage the grinding stone in the final posi-
tion and switch off the grinding device.
20. Stop the doffer.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 279

Maintenance
21. Switch the card off and secure it against

switching back on.
22. Check the grinding result on the doffer cloth-
ing with a magnifying glass and allow the
grinding machine to make more passages
using the same setting as required.
23. Close the service flap.
Notes
After re-clothing the doffer with the stan-
dard clothing, you have to lightly grind the
clothing.
Increase the number of passages for
standard clothings until approximately
70 % of the tips are activated. This is
equivalent to approximately 20 passag-
es.
280 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Grinding the revolving flats clothing

To grind the revolving flats clothing clothing, use
the TC-FG grinding device.
1 2 3
The diagram opposite shows the typical appear-
ance of wire tips:
1 Wire tip of a new clothing
2 Worn wire tip
3 Reground wire tip
You fit the grinding device as follows:
1. Open the card housing upwards so that the

front flats area is accessible.
Caution
Possible damage to the flats! 4
Fit the roll holder (4) on the correct side of
the machine in accordance with the print
("left" and "right").
Make sure that the pins of the flats sit in
the guide grooves of the plastic profiles.
2. Place the roll holder on the flats frame as
shown in the figure and lift the flats (6) slightly
from underneath as you do so.
5
3. Fasten the roll holders in place on both sides
of the machine with two screws (5).
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 281

Maintenance
Note
Turn the roll to the highest position so that 1
it does not rest on the flats clothing when
fitting.
4. Turn the adjusting screw (1) on both shaft
ends of the roll so that the roll is in the highest
position.
5. Working as a pair, lift the grinding roll by both

shaft ends and lower it into the roll holders (2).
6. Clamp the grinding roll to the lug (4) on both

sides with the clamping element (3) - set the 3
clamping element with the nuts (5) as neces-
sary.
282 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
7. Fasten the traversing gear (2) in place on the

right-hand shaft end with the threaded pin (1). 1 2
8. Position the axial adjuster (3) in the centre by

turning the grinding roll by hand.
Caution
Risk of destroying the clothing! 4 5
Before grinding, check the sense of rota-
tion of the motor. If the sense of rotation
is incorrect, the clothing will be raised and
destroyed. The roll must rotate down-
wards in the direction of the movement of
the flats (see arrow).
9. Push the gear motor (5) onto the left-hand
shaft end. Insert the positioning pin (7) into
the drilled hole (6) on the flat steel as you do 7 6
so.
10. Push on the gear motor as far as it will go and
fasten it in place with two threaded pins (4).
11. Activate the service mode using the key

switch.
12. Select Flats service in the

service menu.
13. Select Flats service again. Service mode
Flats service
Speed
Flats service
TC-FCT 1000mm/min
Power BAE 6
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 283

Maintenance
Caution
Risk of destroying the graphite pins!
Make sure that the graphite pins (1) have
been removed on both sides of the ma- 1
chine.
14. If necessary, remove the graphite pins on both
15. Confirm the warning on the touch screen.
16. Check the TC-PFS-M flats gap and confirm
the warning.
17. When prompted, deactivate the flats cleaning

unit; to do so, turn the stop lever (2) down-
wards as far as it will go.
18. Check the stop function on the hand held

remote control (3). 3
284 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
The grinding device has been fitted properly.

19. Mark one flat as the reference flat and remove 1 2
the neighbouring flats to the left and right.
20. Move the reference flat to one of the two mea-
suring points "3" (2) or "4" (1).
21. Use the flats gauge to measure the gap
between the reference flat and the cylinder
clothing.
22. Move the revolving flat further using the hand
held remote control and replace the flat pins
which have been removed.
23. Move one flat into the central position under-

neath the roll using the hand held remote con- 3 4
trol.
24. Set the gap between the clothing and the
grinding roll to a dimension of 7/1000" on both
the left and right.
25. Unfasten the locking mechanism (3) on both
sides of adjusting screw and set the adjusting
screw (4) to "0".
26. Fasten the locking mechanism again.
DANGER
Fingers may become entangled in the ro-
tating roll.
right of the card during the grinding pro- Service mode
cess. Flats service Flats service
27. Switch on the grinding roll drive. Speed
Caution Flats service
Risk of destroying the flat pins!

TC-FCT 1000mm/min
First select Flats service from the ser-
vice menu and then select Flats service
from the menu again (see figure on the
right) before you start the revolving flat.
28. Start the revolving flat. Power BAE 6
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 285

Maintenance
The revolving flat and the grinding device are in op-

eration. The revolving flat runs at the permanently
set speed of 300mm/min.
29. Working as a pair, gradually and slowly turn

down the left and right setting dial (1) on the 1
grinding device until a small and even amount 3
of sparks fly across the entire width of the roll. 2
1
30. Equalise the revolving flats with a full turn of

the grinding roll so that all tips are at the same
height.
31. Then turn the grinding roll down a further 0.3
mm.
Note
A long graduation mark on the setting dial
is equivalent to 0.1 mm, i.e. the number 3
on the setting dial is equivalent to 0.3
mm.
32. Mark the first finished ground flat pin with a
pen.
33. Once the revolving flat has passed through
fully, reset the setting dial to zero and switch
off the grinding roll drive and the revolving
flats drive.
286 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Note
Replace the emery belt on the grinding
roll with a new one approximately every
25 grindings. Only use the original Trüt-
zschler emery belt.
34. Then check the clothing tips with the magnify-

ing glass.
1 2
If the grinding results are no satisfactory, carry out
a second run-through without equalisation, starting
with point 23.
35. Check the clothing tips again with the magni-
fying glass and, if necessary, repeat the steps
starting from point 23.
36. Then remove the marked flat, move it to the
same measuring point "3" (2) or "4" (1) and
measure the distance between the flat pin and
the cylinder clothing.
The difference between the measured value before
grinding and the measured value after grinding is
the amount of grinding. Place the revolving flat with
the TC-PFS flats adjustment system lower towards
the main cylinder clothing by the same amount as
the amount of grinding as follows.
37. Reduce the current dimension of the flats gap

using the lever (3) and the dial (4) by the
3
same amount as the amount of grinding.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 287

Maintenance
Removing and installing the suction hood and knife on the 1st licker-in
You have to replace the worn knife (1) on the first
licker-in with a new one every two years. To per-
form this work, you should also remove and clean 1
the adjoining suction hood (2).
In preparation, you have to remove the lower trunk
of the tuft feeder (see instructions starting on page
234) and shift the feed table towards the tuft feeder.
Removing the suction hood

1. Remove the suction ducts from the suction
hoods on both sides of the machine.
2. Unscrew the three screws (4) on the transition
piece (3) on the right-hand side of the
machine.
3. Remove the transition piece.
3
4
4. On licker-ins with three rolls move the TC-

PMS knife adjusting system into the mainte- 0° 5
nance position (5) using the lever (6). 7,5°
On licker-ins with one roll the position of the 15°
knife is not important. CHLER

TRÜTZS
5. Unscrew and remove the screw (7) on the left-

hand side of the machine and carefully lift out
the suction hood.
6. Wipe off the inside of the suction hood and all
fibre carrying areas with a damp cloth.
6
7
288 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Replacing the knife on the first licker-in
7. Unscrew the screws (2) and remove the knife.

1
8. Insert the new knife and lightly tighten the
screws so that the knife is held in place.
9. Set the position of the knife to the first licker-in
roll using both eccentrics (1) and a setting
gauge:
1.3 mm or 51/1000'' (see also information
starting on page 111)
10. Firmly tighten the screws (2).
11. Place the suction hood in the nesting (3) and

push it in straight.
12. Screw the suction hood in place with the
screw (4).
13. Screw on the transition piece on the right-
hand side of the machine.
14. Place the suction ducts on the transition
pieces on both sides of the machine.
15. Push the feed table up to the licker-in and set

the distance to the first licker-in with a gauge:
1,0 mm or 40/1000'' (see also page 98)
16. Screw the feed table to the frame.
17. Fit the tuft feeder's lower trunk.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 289

Maintenance
Removing the twin top cassette

Note
Always carry out the work described in
the following in pairs in order to avoid tilt-
ing the fixed flats.
Switch off the master switch and lock it with a 1
padlock to prevent it from being switched back
on.
2. Mark the cassettes in accordance with the
numbers on the main cylinder with a pen 4
before removal.
3. Remove the screw (2) on the right-hand side 2
of the machine, whilst leaving the adjusting
screw (1) untouched.
4. Remove the screw (3) on the left-hand side of

the machine, whilst leaving the adjusting
screws (4) untouched.
5. Working as a pair, remove the fixed flats
evenly. Do not tilt the fixed flats. 3
290 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Replacing the strips with clothing of the twin top cassettes

1. Set down the twin top cassette carefully so
that the sections do not become damaged.
2. Unscrew all the hexagon socket screws (1).
3. Unfasten and remove the nuts (2), making

sure not to readjust the adjusting screw (3). 2
4. Remove the side part (4) of the twin top cas-

sette.
4
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 291

Maintenance
5. Pull out the strips with clothing (1).

6. Insert the new strips with clothing. 1
7. Tighten the hexagon socket screws (3) with a

dynamometric key.
The appropriate torque is noted on the label
(2) (3 Nm).
8. Put on the side part (5) of the twin top cas-

sette and fasten it firmly with the nuts (4).
4 5
292 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Re-installing the twin top cassette

Caution
Risk of warping the twin top cassettes!
When fitting the twin top cassettes, al-
ways tighten the side with the two adjust-
ing screws first. Otherwise the section
may warp axially.
1
1. Working as a pair, place the twin top cassette
on the main cylinder and screw in place with
the screws (1 and 2) on the left and right-hand
2. Check the specified dimension between the
clothing strip and the main cylinder clothing
with the respective gauge (see recommended
settings on page 110).
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 293

Maintenance
3. If necessary, adjust the dimension between

the twin-top clothing and the main cylinder 1
clothing using the spring-loaded adjusting
screws (1 and 2) in line with Trützschler's set-
ting recommendations.
4
4. If necessary, adjust the tangential position of

the strip with clothing to the main cylinder
clothing using the adjusting screws (3) and
secure by tightening the lock nuts. 2
3
294 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Replacing the knives on MWC suction hoods

The knives in the suction hoods wear out and have
to be replaced approximately every two years. To
1 2
do so, proceed as follows:
1. Unscrew the screws (2) on both sides of the
machine and remove the suction hood (1).
2. Unscrew the screws (4) and remove the tran-

sition piece (5). 3 4
3. Cut the sealing strip on the seam (3) with the
knife.
4. Unscrew the three screws (7).

6 7
5. Firmly screw one of the three screws (8) into
the grooved piece.
6. Remove the suction hood adapter (6) using a
slot screwdriver and the screw and a lever (8).
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 295

Maintenance
7. Unfasten all nine screws (1) on the knife a lit-

tle and pull the knife out of the profile to the
side.
8. Completely unfasten the screw slot nuts (3)

and screws (2) from the old knife and screw 2
them loosely on the new knife.
9. Insert the new knife (4) into the suction hood

profile from the side.
10. Set dimension a at both ends of the knife with
a feeler gauge (0.05 mm).
11. Tighten the screws, starting in the middle and
working outwards, with torque of 4 Nm.
a
12. Screw the suction hood adapter (5) tight with

the three screws (6). 5 6
13. Push the slot nut with the spring pin (7) first
into the suction hood adapter.
296 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
14. Screw the transition piece (2) onto the suction

hood adapter with the screws (1). 1
15. Remove the adjoining components (3) at the

bottom and fit the suction hood with the 4
screws (4).
16. Use a feeler gauge (5) to set the gap between
the knife and the cylinder clothing over the
entire length of the knife in accordance with 3
the setting recommendation (see information
starting on page 116).
17. Re-fit the adjoining components.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 297

Maintenance
Replacing MAGNOTOP clothing strips

The optional MAGNOTOP clothing strips are held
on the flats pins by magnetic force. You can replace
the old clothing strips with new ones directly on the
card.
1. Run the card to empty.
2. Remove the first flat and place it on the flat 1
holder with the clothing facing upwards. 2
Note
Blow the old clothing strip with com-
pressed air before removal so that no re-
sidual material or metal particles get onto
the magnetic surface (3).
3. Raise and remove the old clothing strip (1)
using the special tool (2).
Caution
Possible damage to the flats! Do not use
sharp-edged tools to clean the soft mag-
netic surface.
4. Clean the magnetic surface (3) of the flats

with compressed air; remove any metal parti-
cles stuck to the surface with a strip of adhe- 3
sive tape.
Caution
Possible damage to the clothings! In-
crease the carding gap between the flats
clothing and the cylinder clothing before
you insert flats with new clothing strips
(see page 97).
Note
Before inserting the new clothing strip,
make sure the working direction is cor-
rect.
5. Place a new clothing strip on the magnetic
surface and clip the flat back into the flats
transport belt.
6. Replace all the other clothing strips as
described.
298 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
7. Check and set the carding gap between the

flats clothing and the cylinder clothing.
Caution
Possible damage to the flats! When the
flats for the card are replaced you have to
reset the penetration depth of the flats
strips roll. The flat will otherwise be dam-
aged.
This applies in particular when replacing
CLASSIC TOP with MAGNOTOP flats.
8. Set and check the penetration depth of the
flats strips roll (see information starting on
page 100).
Replacing the flats transport belt

The flats transport belt is an expendable part and
should be replaced every two years.
When changing the flats transport belt you must ro- 1
tate the flats system. This can be performed either
manually or using the motor.
Rotating the flats system manually

9. Switch off the card and secure it to prevent it
from being switched on.
10. Turn the stop lever (1) clockwise to separate
(disengage) the cleaning roll and flats cloth-
ing.
11. Remove the graphite pins.
DANGER
Risk of crushing from rotating flats!
If the flats are arranged asymmetrically,
the flat may can rotate once the shearing
pin is removed.
Fix the flat in place before removing the
shearing pin.
12. Remove the shearing pin (3) from the rear 3
2
flats drive shaft on the right-hand side.
13. Turn the flats system to the desired position
by the hexagon (2) on the rear flats drive
shaft.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 299

Maintenance
Rotating the flats transport system using the motor
1. Activate service mode.

2. Select the Flats service menu.
3. Turn the stop lever (1) clockwise to separate

(disengage) the cleaning roll and flats cloth-
ing. 1
4. Remove the graphite pins.
5. Connect the hand held remote control if you

have not already done so. 2
6. Enter the desired flats speed on the operating
panel. 3
7. Move the flats into the desired position using
the operating keys on the had held remote 4
control: 0
– To move the flat forwards, press key (2).
– To move the flat backwards, press key (3).
– To move the flat backwards, press key (4).
300 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Replacing the flats transport belt
1. Switch off the card and secure it to prevent it

from being switched on.
2. Remove the flats.
3. Unscrew the threaded pin (5) on the toothed

belt wheel (3). 1 2 3
4. Push the toothed belt wheel inwards.

5. Unfasten the clamping ring (1) and the screws
(2) on the flange bearing (6). 4
6. Pull the flange bearing from the drive shaft
(4).
6 5
Caution
Possible serious damage to the card! In-
7 8
sert the flats transport belt in the same di-
rection and align the belts parallel to each
other.
7. Place the flats transport belt (7) over the drive
shaft (8) from the inside.
The arrows showing the direction (9) on both
flats transport belts must point the same way.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 301

Maintenance
8. Align both flats transport belts parallel to each

other.
9. To do so, attach the installation aids (1) on
10. Place the installation aids over two cams (2)

so that the arrows indicating the running direc- 2
tion can be seen in the recesses.
11. Shift the flats transport belt on both sides of
the machine using the installation aids so that
the screws (3) can be screwed into the cast
part (4).
12. Fully attach the toothed belt.
13. Unscrew and remove the installation aids.
3
4
302 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Attaching the flats

1. Check the horizontal position of the rear drive
shaft and the deflection device (4) with a spirit 1 2 3 4
level.
2. Readjust the position as necessary.
3. Place flat (2) before the entry of flats (1) on
the guide rails (3).
4. Turn the revolving flat in the working direction.
Attach a further flat in every second position
as you do so.
5. Once the first flat (6) enters at the front deflec-

tion device (5), check the horizontal position 5
of the flat.
6. Set the spacing between flats clothing and
main cylinder clothing (see page 95).
7. Set the graphite pins (see page 304).
8. Set the flats run monitoring.
9. Attach the remaining flats.
6
10. Set the belt tension of the flats transport belt
(see Seite 213).
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 303

Maintenance
Setting the graphite pins

1. First set the dimension on both graphite pins
at the front (1) as specified in the figure.
2. Set the specified dimension on both graphite
pins at the rear (2).
+0,5 +0,5
7 mm 7 mm
1 2
Setting the flats run monitoring

1. Set the gap between the sensor on the flats
run monitoring and the flats pins.
Note
You can make the settings more easily if
only every second flat is attached.
2. Fasten the sensor to the pins of the flat with
both hexagon socket screws (3). +0,5
1 mm
304 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Replacing the battery on the KSZ5 board

DANGER
Risk of death through electric shock!
Have all work on the control unit carried
out by specialist staff only and when the
machine is switched off.
1. Switch off machine and secure it to prevent it
from being switched back on.
2. Open the control cabinet.
Caution
Possible control unit malfunctions!
1 2 3
Carefully take the battery out of the hol-
der. Do not bend the clamping spring (1)
up, otherwise the battery will no longer
have a contact.
3. On the KSZ5 board, carefully press the black
plastic lug (3) outwards with a suitable tool so
that the button cell (2) is released from the
bracket by the force of the spring from below.
4. Remove the button cell from the bracket.
Caution
Possible damage to the machine's con-
trol unit!
Insert the battery carefully into the holder.
Do not use brute force.
Only use a type CR 2032 3V button cell
with 200 mAh.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 305

Maintenance
Caution
Risk of damage to control unit and
1 2
machine!
Carefully Place the battery in the holder.
Do not use force.
Only use a type CR 2032 3 V button cell
with 200 mAH.
5. Insert a new 3 V button cell into the holder
with the marked plus pole (2) facing upwards.
To do so, push the button cell under the
clamping spring (1) and push it down so that it
clicks into place underneath the plastic lug (3). 3
Note
To prevent the battery from discharging
prematurely, you can clamp a piece of
non-conductive material between the
battery and the clamping spring as insu-
lation when the control unit is not in use.
6. Close the control cabinet doors.
7. Switch on the machine and plant.
306 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Card lubrication schedule

Only the following bearings on the card must be Notes
regularly lubricated. All other bearings have a life- Information on the type of lubricant and
long lubrication, i.e. for an operating period of five the required quantity can often be found
years (approximately 40,000 operating hours). on the type plates of the respective gear
unit.
You will find the product names of various
manufacturers in the Table of lubricants
on page 309.
The tables are arranged by intervals.
Left-hand machine side
1 2
4 3
Frequency in hours
Item Task
4.000 8.000 40.000
2 2 delivery rolls Lubricate the bearings with 1.2 g of grease each x

(KE2/3R-30).
3 Doffer Lubricate the bearings with 120 g of grease each x

(K2K-20).
4 Cylinder Lubricate the bearings with 180 g of grease each x

(K2K-20).
1 DFK feed roll Oil change with 1.8 litre (CLP/PG 220) x
gear motor
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 307

Maintenance
Right-hand machine side
4 3 2
Frequency in hours
Item Task
8.000 40.000
3 Cylinder Lubricate the bearings approximately 180 g of x

grease
(K2K-20).
4 Doffer Lubricate the bearings approximately 120 g of x

grease
(K2K-20).
1 Flats drive gears Oil change with 1.5 litres (CLP PG 1000) x
2 Feed roll drive gear Oil change with 0.5 litre (CLP VG 220) x
unit
308 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Maintenance
Table of lubricants
Caution
Machine elements may be subject to pre- Lubricants with the following specifications are re-
mature wear! quired to lubricate the machine in the proper man-
Do not mix mineral lubricants with syn- ner. The table contains various manufacturer and
thetic lubricants under any circumstanc- product names to provide you with alternatives
es! Only use lubricants which are speci- when purchasing.
fied in this table.
Greases and oils

DIN
specification CLP VG 220 CLP PG 1000
KE2/3R-30 K2K-20
(mineral) (synthetic)
Supplier
ARAL Aralub HL 2 Degol BG 220 Degol GS 1000
BP Energrease LS 2 Energol GR-XP 220
CALTEX Meropa 220 Synlube WS 1000
CASTROL Optimol Firetemp Olista Longtime 2 Alpha SP 220 Tribol 800/1000
XT 2
Longtime PD 2 Tribol 1100/220 Tribol 1300/1000
Spheerol MP 2 Optigear BM 220 Optiflex A 1000
ESSO Unirex N 2 Spartan EP 220
FUCHS Renolit GP 2 Renolin CLP 220 Renolin PG 1000
Renolin CLP 220 Plus
KLÜBER Asonic HQ 72-102 Centoplex 2 Klüberoil GEM 1-220 N Klübersynth GH 6-
1000
Klüberquiet BQH
72-102
KYODO YUSHI Multemp SB-M
MOBIL Mobilgear 600 XP 220 Glygoyle 1000
SHELL Alvania RL2 Omala 220 Tivela S 1000
Omala F 220
Omala HD 220
TEXACO Multifak MP 2 Meropa 220 Synlube WS 1000
TOTAL Multis 2 Carter EP 220
Trützschler SM 100/2 Alvania RL2
Trützschler 400 g 200 kg:
part number: cartridge: 0 350 83,302,000
0 350 83 302 016
50 kg:
25 kg: 0 350 83 302 003
0 350 83,302,015
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 309

Maintenance
310 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
Appendix
In this chapter you will find further information such as technical data, equipment, an index of specialist
terms and a list of abbreviations, a table of expendable parts as well as instructions for the transportation of
the card.
Technical specification
General data 3360
4180
2000
Dimensions (H x W x D) 3,360 x 2,000 x 4,180 [mm]

Working width of tuft feeder 963 mm with fixed tray
with optional moving tray
Working width of the card 1,020 mm
Compressed air requirement 1,400 NI/h (minimum of 7.0 bar from compressed air network)
Net weight TC 5-1: approximately 6200 kg (card and tuft feeder)
TC 5-3: approximately 6340 kg (card and tuft feeder)
Floor load approximately 7,500 N/m2
Maximum surface pressure per base plate approximately 33 N/cm2
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 311

Appendix
Production
Max. continuous production [kg/h] 1) TC 5-1: 80
TC 5-3: 120
Max. delivery speed [m/min] TC 5-1: 240
TC 5-3: 400
Feed
Max. material rate [kg/h] TC 5-1: 80
TC 5-3: 120
Max. blowing air rate [m3/h] 1,500
Operating pressure [Pa] min. 600 / max. 1,200
DFK tuft feeder dust extraction

Max. exhaust air rate [m3/h] 1,670
Operating pressure [Pa] min. -20 / max. -50
Dust throughput [kg/h] 0.25
Card waste suction
surface mounted:
Max. waste quantity [kg/h] 10
Max. suction air rate [m3/h] 3,700 + 5 %
Operating pressure [Pa] –740
flush mounted:
1)
The actual production output depends on the optional equipment, material characteristics and other ambient conditions.
312 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
Optional filter box
Dust extraction, continuous

Max. exhaust air rate [m3/h] 4,100 + 5 %
Max. dust throughput [kg/h] 0.2
Waste suction, intermittent
Max. waste quantity 10 kg/h at 1 kg per suction cycle 2)
Optional flats waste suction

Suction air rate [m3/h] 350 + 10 %
2)
A suction cycle lasts at least 5 seconds and is repeated at least every 6 minutes.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 313

Appendix
Continuous power consumption

The maximum continuous power consumption de-
pends on the speed of the cylinder and the produc- 16
tion rate. For the actual power consumption refer to [kW] 15
the diagram opposite. It shows the maximum con- 14
13
tinuous power consumption (P [kW]) above the 12
production output ([kg/h]) for three different cylinder 11 m
10 600 rp
speeds. m
9 500 rp
8
pm
7 400 r
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
[kg/h]
ISO 4871 noise emission values
Operating status without material, max. cylinder speed 600 rpm, integrated fan,
n = 2860 rpm, central suction
Effective perceived emission Danger for the emission

sound pressure level sound pressure level
LpA [dB(A)] KpA [dB(A)]
Delivery speed [m/min] 100: 67 4

250: 73 4
400: 75 4
The values have been determined in line with noise test standard DIN EN ISO 9902 with reference to basic
standard DIN EN ISO 11204 The sum of the measured noise emission value and the corresponding dan-
ger represents the upper limit which may occur during measurements.
314 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
Standard equipment Options and additional equipment

– Digitally controlled servo motors for feed roll, Depending on the area of use, material and re-
doffer, delivery unit and coiler quired quality, the following options and additional
equipment are available:
– T-CON carding gap optimisation
– Speed regulation for cylinder and WEBFEED
– TC-CB electronic main cylinder brake
TC-VSD (TC 5-3 only)
– Infinitely variable flats speed
– MAGNOTOP TC-MT aluminium flats
– WEBSPEED sliver former
– T-CON carding gap optimisation TC-TC
– CLASSIC TOP aluminium flats
– TC-MD metal detector for feeding
– Safety central locking
– TC-II interior lighting
– Spectrogram calculation, thick spots detec-
– Sockets in the TC-P frame
tion, short-term CV values, maintenance man-
agement – TC-TS transverse web delivery belt (for pro-
ductions < 150 kg/h or card delivery speeds <
– Data exchange between machines using CF
300 m/min only)
card
– TC-NCT NEPCONTROL nep sensor
– TKN network interface to installation control
unit – TC-FCT FLATCONTROL flats measuring sys-
tem
– Tuft feeder control
– Mount for the TC-SF flats grinding system
– CCD long-term control
– TC-FB intermittent waste suction with filter
box
– CM automatic coiler
– CCA automatic coiler with can changer
If you have questions on the individual options,
please contact the Trützschler after-sales depart-
ment.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 315

Appendix
Specialist terms Abbreviations

A% Sliver deviation
Availability
Possible production time / shift length (fault-free CC Can Changer, can changer
time) x 100 % CV value Variation of sliver count
Can filling CV% CV value at the output
Length of produced sliver after which an automatic
can change is carried out. DFK Tuft feeder
Delivery D% Draft deviation
Speed with which the material leaves the machine
dtex Unit of measure for fibre count (decitex)
(delivery speed)
E Efficiency
Draft deviation D%
Ratio of actual draft to target draft g Gram(s)
Draft gr Grain, 1 gr = 64.799 mg
Ratio of the peripheral speed of the feed roll to the
delivery roll in the deposited sliver system gr/yd Grains/yard
Efficiency ICFD Fineness regulation for the web

Production time / shift time of the machine x 100% ktex Kilotex (g/m)
Flex unit l Wave length in the spectrogram
flexible arrangement of cards for two feed lines
lb Pound, 1 lb = 453.59 g
Limit value
Limit values are cut-off values. The red indicator mi Mile(s)
lamp lights up. A fault message appears on the op-
MWC Multi-Web-Clean suction hood
erating panel.
MTT Multi-twin-top fixed flat
Lot data
Setpoints for the active lot NCT Nep sensor
Sliver deviation A%: Ne Number in English/imperial (yd/lb)
Deviation of the actual sliver weight from the set-
point sliver weight as a percentage Nm Number in metric (m/g)
Sliver fineness TC-PFS-M

or sliver count, in Nm (m/g) or Ne Flats adjustment system
Sliver weight TC-PMS-M

in ktex (g/m) or gr/yd blade adjustment system
Spectrogram TKN Trützschler Kommunikations Netzwerk

Displays periodic faults as vertical columns (Trützschler communication network)
Thick spot TST Trützschler Service Tool
Short, sharp increase in mass of the sliver pro- yd Yard(s), 1 yd = 0.9144 m
duced
V value
Variation coefficient of mass distribution of a sliver
in running direction
316 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
Expendable parts
The intervals for replacement are based on stan- Note
dard materials and proper use of the machine. De- You will find further expendable parts in
pending on the material used and the production the catalogue of replacement parts.
rate, the actual wear and tear may differ.
The table is arranged according to frequency of re-
placement and in ascending alphabetical order.
Frequency
Designation Part No. Quantity of replace- TC 5-1 TC 5-3
ment
High-temperature grease SM 100/2 035083302016 2.4 g 6 months x x

Alvania grease 035083302003 580 cm3 1 year x x
TC-CI filter element 037181761577 1x 1 year x x
TC-CI slide valve 037181761583 5x 1 year x x
Toothed belt HTD 720-D8M-20 035081755833 1x 1 year x x
Blade, flats cleaning device 980022630062 1x 2 years x x
Blade, suction hood, top 990522410033 see 2 years x x
page 116
Cup brush 976000648003 2x 2 years x x

Flat belt W = 15 mm, L = 1,450 mm 035081755356 1x 2 years x
Flat belt W = 20 mm, L = 1088 mm 035081755353 1x 2 years x x
Flat belt W = 25 mm, L = 1,690 mm 035081755250 1x 2 years x
Flat belt W = 50 mm, L = 3,530 mm 035081755363 1x 2 years x x
Hard fabric scraper, bottom see 1x 2 years x x
catalogue of re-
placement parts
Hard fabric scraper, top (26 mm) 991300180045 1x 2 years x x

Knife, 1st licker-in (1 roll) 991422137004 1x 2 years x
Knife, 1st licker-in (3 rolls) 991322130031 1x 2 years x
MWC knife 990522410010 see 2 years x x
page 116
Scraper blade 991322160084 1x 2 years x x

Scraper blade 991322160149 1x 2 years x x
Sealing ring 105/75 Ø 6+8 WN2233T.16 035081223258 2x 2 years x x
Sealing ring 150/120 980300200140 6x 2 years x
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 317

Appendix
Frequency
ment
Sealing strip PE felt, foam rubber 976000170003 2x 2 years x x

Synchroflex toothed belt, 84 cams 976000630002 2x 2 years x x
T-CON carbon contact, complete 991400145029 1x 2 years x x
Toothed belt HTD 1120-D8M-20 035081755847 1x 2 years x x
Toothed belt HTD 1328-8M-20 035081755836 1x 2 years x
Toothed belt HTD 1360-8M-20 035081755837 1x 2 years x x
Toothed belt HTD 1520-8M-20 035081755832 1x 2 years x x
Toothed belt HTD 1600-8M-20 035081755853 1x 2 years x
Toothed belt HTD 800-D8M-20 035081755834 1x 2 years x x
V-ledges with chamfered groove, left and right 980000630016 2x 2 years x x
Wool felt / PU foam 976000151021 2x 2 years x
Bearing unit, delivery INA 991300181001 2x 5 years x x
Clamping profile 30 x 30 [mm], self-adhesive 137182090041 7.2 m 5 years x x
Cover section, 2nd licker-in, front 991322130017 1x 5 years x x
Cover section, 2nd licker-in, rear 991322130018 2x 5 years x x
Cylinder, knife bar, bottom, complete 991300810006 1x 5 years x x
Cylinder, knife bar, top, complete 991300810004 1x 5 years x x
Cylinder, measuring funnel, complete 991300810002 1x 5 years x x
Cylinder, Webspeed, complete 991300810003 1x 5 years x x
Deep groove ball bearing 6006 2RS DIN625 035081730224 10 x 5 years x x
Deep groove ball bearing 6207, 2RS, DIN625 035081730167 2x 5 years x
Deep groove ball bearing 6308, VV, DIN625 035081730199 6x 5 years x x
Edge protection profile 21 x 9.3 [mm] 035081221353 9m 5 years x x
Edge protection sealing profile 035081221355 2m 5 years x x
Flange bearing RFE 35 035081732040 2x 5 years x x
Foam rubber cord Ø 8 WN 2213 T.1 035081221205 2.5 m 5 years x
Foam rubber profile 7.0 x 7.5 (± 0.4) [mm] 980300200140 0.8 m 5 years x x
Gore-shaped section, 2nd licker-in, bottom 991322130044 1x 5 years x x
Graphite stone, ground 976000623005 2x 5 years x x
Hollow profile 12 x 10 [mm], foam rubber 035081221214 1.3 m 5 years x x
Hollow profile 12 x 10.4 x 1048 [mm] combination 035081221284 6x 5 years x x
profile
318 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
Frequency
ment
Hollow profile 12 x 10.4 x 916 [mm], combination 035081221285 4x 5 years x x

profile
Inspection window, left 991300130053 1x 5 years x

Inspection window, right 991300130054 1x 5 years x
Lamellar double ring FK6 ASD 035081717005 4x 5 years x x
Lamellar double ring FK6 ASD, Ø 41 mm 035081717002 8x 5 years x x
MTT cover section, below front 991322430008 1x 5 years x x
MTT cover section, below rear 991322410001 1x 5 years x
MTT cover section, below rear 991322410009 1x 5 years x
Opening roll, complete 991469115001 1x 5 years x
PMS inspection window 991400137080 2x 5 years x
Pneumatic spring F=1500 N, A=150 mm, 035081810530 2x 5 years x
W=435.5 mm
Pneumatic spring F=1700 N, A=140 mm, W=430 035081810552 2x 5 years x

mm

mm
Pneumatic spring F=500 N, A=60 mm, W=205.5 035081810521 1x 5 years x

mm

mm
Seal , duct 1, licker-in left, flush 991300590016 1x 5 years x

Seal , duct 1, licker-in right, surface 991300590007 1x 5 years x
Seal N Z 760-00.861.000 035081221250 0.6 m 5 years x x
Seal, (15 mm) 991300630017 1x 5 years x x
Seal, 1st licker-in 991300590005 2x 5 years x
Seal, comb box, bottom left 980300190014 1x 5 years x x
Seal, comb box, bottom right 980300190013 1x 5 years x x
Seal, comb box, top left 980300190009 1x 5 years x x
Seal, comb box, top right 980300190008 1x 5 years x x
Seal, duct, flats cleaning, left 991300590059 1x 5 years x x
Seal, extension bend 991300410007 4x 5 years x x
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 319

Appendix
Frequency
ment
Seal, funnel and web doffer 991300590018 1x 5 years x x

Seal, licker-in bearing 991300130022 4x 5 years x
Seal, main collector 991300590061 1x 5 years x x
Seal, main collector, flush mounted 991300590075 1x 5 years x x
Seal, round 991300160126 3x 5 years x x
Seal, round (15 mm) 990500630035 2x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, cover, front left 991300590054 1x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, MWC doffer side 991300590050 1x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, MWC licker-in side 991300590051 2x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, transfer unit 991300590036 1x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, transfer unit, web doffer, right 991300590067 1x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, Webfeed left 991300590048 1x 5 years x
Seal, suction duct, Webfeed, left surface mount- 991300590032 1x 5 years x
ed
Seal, UC duct / main collector 991300590019 1x 5 years x x

Sealing ring (PE-UHMW/KLS) 980300190129 2x 5 years x x
Sealing ring, collector for combs 991300120026 4x 5 years x x
Sealing strip 3 x 10 [mm], self-adhesive 035081232440 1m 5 years x x
Sealing strip 3 x 8 [mm], self-adhesive 035081232439 8m 5 years x
Sealing strip 9 x 13 [mm], self-adhesive 035081260050 1.5 m 5 years x x
Shaft sealing ring BASL 35 x 47 x 7 [mm] 035081712626 1x 5 years x x
Shaft sealing ring BASL 45 x 60 x 7 [mm] 035081712633 3x 5 years x x
Snap-lock coupling Ø 10 mm 035081630229 12 x 5 years x x
Snap-lock coupling Ø 8 mm 035081630228 4x 5 years x x
Spiral hose, nominal width 100 mm 035081250036 6.5 m 5 years x x
Tension roller, complete 991300180001 2x 5 years x x
Tension roller, Ø 102/85 mm, complete 991400340010 1x 5 years x
Tension roller, Ø 92 mm, complete 991400340012 2x 5 years x x
Tension roller, smooth ( Ø 73 mm) 991300160014 1x 5 years x x
320 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
Frequency
ment
Textile foam 10 x 3 [mm] 035081232440 3m 5 years x x

Transition piece, front top left 990500430006 1x 5 years x x
Transition piece, front top right 990500430007 1x 5 years x x
Transition piece, left 990500440015 2x 5 years x x
Transition piece, MTT, left 990500410018 variable 5 years x x
Transition piece, rear top left 990500410039 1x 5 years x x
Transition piece, rear top right 990500410040 1x 5 years x x
1. Licker-in roll (needle licker-in) 991322130084 1x as required x x
Differential pressure switch 100-1000 PA 942000207001 1x as required x x
Displacement sensor C12 037181882961 1x as required x x
Displacement sensor C6 136182205050 1x as required x x
Grinding belt for TC-FG 037207100002 1x as required x x
Inductive proximity switch 136082205048 2x as required x x
Inductive proximity switch M12 x 1 136082205046 4x as required x x
Inductive proximity switch M18 x 1 136082205047 3x as required x x
Safety locking device, 24 VDC, 50/60 Hz 136082204050 6x as required x x
Safety switch AZ 17 2 break contact 136082204061 1x as required x x
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 321

Appendix
Storage
After unloading, the machine must be stored in a Different transportation aids are included in the de-
dry environment. Do not remove the packaging livery depending on how the card is delivered. If de-
material and foil until shortly before installation. livered without a container, the card can be moved
Protect the machine from external damage. by crane. If delivered with a container, it can be
transported on rollers and a steering carriage.
Anti-corrosive If you wish to move the card to another location at
If you do not use the machine for a longer period, a later date, you will require the transportation aids
you must protect all non-lacquered parts of the ma- which Trützschler include in the delivery. Store
chine from corrosion. This applies in particular to these transportation aids in a safe place once the
the functional surfaces which you can best protect card has been commissioned so that they are
with special anti-tarnish paper. You can preserve available should they be required.
other non-lacquered machine parts with a light oil
mist. DANGER
Risk of serious injury from falling loads!
Only ever use the transportation aids de-
Transport livered with the machine and adhere to
If you wish to transport the delivered card to your the following guidelines on transporta-
production location, use the transportation aids in- tion.
cluded in the scope of delivery. Store these trans- Make sure that no persons are situated in
portation aids in a safe place once the card has dangerous areas during transportation.
been commissioned so that they are available The card is delivered as shown in the following fig-
should they be required. ure. The card is screwed to a pallet in four places
and secured against slipping by two pieces of
squared timber.
322 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
Delivery in a container
1. Unscrew the four nuts and both pieces of squared timber.
2. Screw on the four transport brackets in the corners of the card frame.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 323

Appendix
3. Lead the two rectangular tubes through the screw-fastened brackets and place the jack centrally
underneath the front tube.
4. Raise the card until the support blocks fit under the corners of the card in the low position. Using the
jack, carefully lower the card onto the front support blocks.
324 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
5. Position the jack centrally beneath the rear rectangular tube and raise until the support blocks fit under
the rear corners of the card in the high position. Using the jack, carefully lower the card onto the rear
support blocks.
360
6. Raise the front side of the card using the jack so that the support block fits under the corners in the
high position; carefully lower the card onto the front support blocks.
440
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 325

Appendix
7. Working in a pair, pull the pallet out from underneath the card to the side.
361
431
8. Screw the rollers from below onto the rear end of the frame.
326 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
9. Using the jack, lower the card to the low position of the support blocks in two stages - first at the front,
then at the rear.
440
360
10. Then remove the shaft from the steering carriage (see arrow) so that you can place the jack centrally.
11. Position the steering carriage centrally beneath the frame of the card.
12. Raise the card on the rectangular tube using the jack. Remove the support blocks and carefully lower
the card onto the steering carriage.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 327

Appendix
13. Screw the shaft of the steering carriage back on.

14. Raise the card at the rear on the rectangular tube using the jack. Remove the support blocks and
carefully lower the card onto the rollers.
15. Carefully tow the card into place using a fork-lift truck.
328 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
16. Raise the card in the place where it is to stand in two stages using the jack (see steps 4 to 6) and
lower it onto the support blocks.
17. Unscrew the rollers from the rear of the card frame and remove the steering carriage from beneath the
card.
18. Place four round steel bars parallel to each other under the card frame.
19. Firstly lower the card onto the support blocks in two stages using the jack (see step 9).
20. Lower the card onto the round steel bars.
280 30
Ø
21. Align the card and place base plates underneath the eight stand bolts of the machine frame.
22. Raise the card by screwing the stand bolts and remove the round steel bars.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 329

Appendix
Delivery without a container

If the card is delivered without a container, two ad- Caution
ditional transporting devices are enclosed. The Possible damage to the web doffer when
card can be transported by crane with the help of a raising the card with the rope sling.
traverse and two rope slings. Clamp the foam cushions delivered with
the card between the card and the rope
DANGER sling.
Risk of death from falling loads!
1. Release the card from the pallet as described
Adhere to the relevant safety regulations
onwards from page 323 in steps 1 to 6 and fit
for the securing of loads and the opera-
with the transport aids.
tion of cranes.
2. Use the rope slings and the traverse as
shown in the following figure.
330 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Appendix
Stopping the machine

Initial start-up and stoppage, disassembly and dis- Disassembly
posal are not contained in these operating instruc-
tions as these tasks must be carried out by Trüt- DANGER
zschler after-sales service staff only. This also Risk of serious injury from the clothings!
applies to temporary stoppage of the machine, for A clothing wire is fitted to a roll under ten-
instance, if the machine is to be transferred to an- sion. If for instance you cut the clothing
other location. wire with bolt cutters, the toothed ends of
the wire will jump around uncontrollably.
Caution To remove the clothings, use the special
Risk of serious damage to the machine! tools which are available from Trüt-
If you wish to take the machine out of ser- zschler. This is the only way to remove
vice yourself, make sure that there is no the clothings safely.
residual material in the machine. Residu-
al material hardens and can cause dam- Caution
age serious to the machine when it is be- Possible damage to the machine assem-
ing re-started. bly groups!
You can prepare stoppage of the machine as fol- If disassembled incorrectly, the assembly
lows: groups may become irreparably dam-
aged. For more information, contact the
1. Convey or manually remove residual material Trützschler after-sales service depart-
from the machine. ment.
2. Switch off the master switch.
Disposal
3. Allow all further steps to be performed by the
Trützschler after sales service department. Operating media, electronic modules, recyclable
materials and other parts of the machine must be
disposed of according to national and regional en-
vironmental laws. For more detailed information on
disposal, contact the relevant local authority.
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 331

Appendix
EC conformity
as per EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, Appendix II, 1. A.
Manufacturer
Name Trützschler GmbH & Co. KG
Address Postfach 41 01 64
The following machine, in its delivered state, is in conformity with the EC directives listed in the following.
Machine
Types Card TC 5-1 / TC 5-3
Type Nos. 914 22 62 / 914 22 42
The following EC Directives have been applied:

2006/42/EC
2006/95/EC
2004/108/EC
The following harmonised standards have been applied:

DIN EN ISO 12100 - 1+2
EN ISO 13849 - 1
DIN EN ISO 11111 - 1+2
EN ISO 14121 - 1
DIN EN 60204 - 1
332 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Index
A Clothings
Checking 223
Abbreviations 316
Service intervals 256
Actuation, rotary can plate, setting 67, 68
Code
Anti-corrosive 322
Changing 52
Automatic can change 42
Resetting to default values 52
Code levels 52
Coiler 24
B Comb boxes in the feed table, cleaning 237
Balancing, carrying out 85 Communication interfaces, activating 70
Basic keys 26 Communication menu 70
Bearings, lubricating 307 Condition of clothings, checking 223
Belt pulleys, selecting 62 Control cabinet
Belt tension Overview 200
Checking 210 Cover sections, setting 120
Measuring and setting on the flats transport Covers of the cylinder, cleaning 248
belt 213 Current drafts, displaying 80
Setting 212 Current measured values, displaying 80
Belt type 210 CV value limit, setting 68
Blade adjustment system TC-PMS 21 CV values 74
Blade cleaning 62 Cylinder 18
Braking unit, setting 107 Cylinder clothing
Buttons 25, 29 Condition 224
Grinding 272
Cylinder covers, cleaning 248
C
Can change 42
Can change speed 63 D
Lowering 63 Date and time, setting 58
Setting 68 DEA 2 202
Can changer 24 Degree of cleaning, adjusting 21
Can diameter, selecting 59 Delivery rolls
Can filling position 24 Belts, replacing 246
Can filling, setting 67 Loading of rolls 93
Can monitoring, setting 63 Replacing 91
Card Roll position 92
Balancing 85 Rolls, gap 93
Switching off 49 Setting 90, 92
Switching on 37 Delivery speed 65
Card - coiler tension, setting 66 Delivery unit
Card lubrication schedule 307 With one motor 66
Carding gap optimisation with T-CON 43 With two motors 66
carding strip on the licker-in, condition 227 Delivery unit, selecting 90
Central control unit KSZ5 201 Depth of penetration of the flat strips roll, setting
CFD value, checking 100
EASYFEED 215 DFK
Change points 102 Balancing 85
Channel connector, cleaning 249 Cleaning 232
Checking pneumatic connections 214 Switching on and off 72
Cleaning instructions 228 Switching the slide valve on and off 61
Cleaning intervals 229 DFK outlet filter, setting 108
Clothing strips, replacing (MAGNOTOP) 298 DFK target pressure, setting 65
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 333

Diagnostics / Statistic menu 74 Testing pneumatics 214
DIRECTFEED DFK 17, 18
Displaying current program version values 28
Disposal 331 G
Doffer clothing Gearing diagram 102
Condition 225 Glossary 316
Grinding 277 Graphite pins, setting 304
Doffer section 17, 18, 23 Greases 309
Doffer section, cleaning 242 Grinding device, TC-GD, fitting 273
Doffer, lower cover sections, cleaning 243 Guiding profile, cleaning 247
Door locking, testing 73
Draft deviation 74
Draft V3, changing 104 I
Draft V4
ICFD 85
drive wheel, changing 105
Inching key 27
setting on operating unit 66
Indicator lamp 34
Draft, setting 65
Indicator lamp, checking 219
Drafts, displaying 80
Information about the machine 55
Drives, checking 221
Input and output module, DEA 2 202
Inspection work 207
Intervals for maintenance work 229
E
EASYFEED 17, 18, 19
Calibration 100 K
Settings 98
Key switch 208
Emergency stop push-button 14
Keys 26
Equipment, additional 315
Knives, replacing
Equipment, standard 315
on MTT suction hoods 295
Expendable parts 317
KSZ5 201
KSZ5, replacing the battery 305
F
Fault message 185 L
Feed roll, tuft feeder, setting 98
Language, selecting 53
Feed tray
Lap feeding
EASYFEED 17, 18, 19
Configuration 61
Filter box 60
LED displays in the control cabinet 200
Fine adjustment, performing 86
Licker-in
Fixed flats 17, 18
Entering the number 59
Fixed flats clothing, condition 227
Licker-in clothing, condition 226
Flat strips roll
Licker-in unit
Cleaning 239
Function 20
depth of penetration, setting 100
WEBFEED 17, 18
Flats clothing
Limit value, number of thick spots, setting 69
Condition 223
Loading (table)
Grinding 281
Delivery rolls 94
Flats clothing, condition 223
Squeezing rolls 89
Flats run monitoring, setting 304
Loading of rolls
Flats speed, setting 68
Delivery rolls 93
Flats transport belt, replacing 299
Squeezing rolls 89
Flats, attaching 303
Log book, calling up 54
Flexible bends, setting 95
Long-life clothings, service intervals 264
Frequency converter 204
Lot
Funnel control 72
Creating a new 57
Funnel feeler lever
Delete 57
334 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Displaying 57 NCT monitor
Renaming 57 setting the margin 70
Selecting 57 Switching on and off 73
Lot data, menu 65 NCT monitoring 70
Lot management 56 NCT parameter set 71
Lower cover sections, setting 120
Lower trunk, tuft feeder
Cleaning 234 O
Removing 233 Operating hours counter 55
Lubricants, table 309 Operating unit 25
Options 315
Order numbers 317
M
Machine balancing, performing 85
Machine configuration, menu 59 P
Machine settings, menu 62 Parameter set, NCT 71
Machine sides, definition 10 Part numbers, expendable parts 317
Machine, stopping 331 Piecing up 39
MAGNOTOP clothing strips, replacing 298 Production and speed 110, 126, 141
Main cylinder 17 Production, increasing 12
Main cylinder clothing Program change 58
Condition 224 Program version, displaying 55
Main cylinder drive, selecting 59 Pulley diameter, selecting 62
Main cylinder speed
Increasing 12
Maintenance 228 Q
Maintenance intervals 229
Quality faults, acknowledging with code 64
Changing 81
Resetting 81
Manual can change 42
Manual shift change 82
R
Master switch 14 Removal 331
Maximum V4 draft, setting 66 Repairs and maintenance 255
Measured values, displaying 80 Replacing the battery, KSZ5 305
Measuring funnel, cleaning 246 Reversing 206, 220
Metal detector Revolving flat clothing, activating 281
Configuring 61 Revolving flat system 17, 18, 22
Metal detector, switching on and off 72 Revolving flats area, cleaning 241
Minimum V4 draft, setting 66 RIK module 205
Monitoring suction pressure 72 Roll holders, fitting 281
Motors, checking 220 Roll position, delivery rolls 92
Motors, sense of rotation, checking 220 Rolls, gap
MTT suction hoods Delivery rolls 93
Knives, replacing 295 Squeezing rolls 88
MULTI WEBCLEAN system Rotary can plate, setting 68
Description 22 Rotational speeds 80
Item 17, 18
S
N Sense of rotation of motors, checking 220
NCT Separate flat strips suction 60
data 78 Service functions menu 72
Particle statistics 78 Service mode 208
Web statistics 78 Servo drive type depositing system 59
NCT internal fault 71 Setting the delivery speed 65
914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 335

Setting the limit values for TC-NCT 69 Technical data 311
Settings Thick spots 76
For 100 % cotton 110 Setting 69
For 100 % polyester 126 Switching monitoring on and off 64
For 100 % viscose 141 Time, setting 58
For this machine 170 TKN 70
Shift calendar 83 Tolerance, web thickness 63
Shift change Toothed belt tension 211
At midnight 82 Touch screen 25
Manual 82 Touchscreen 25
Shift data 82 Transport 322
Displaying 82 Transport air outlet filter, setting 108
Slide gate Transporting device 322, 330
Testing pneumatics 214 Transverse web delivery belt, servicing 254
Slide valve, DFK 61 Traverse 330
Sliver count, specifying 65, 86 TST 70
Sliver cutter 63 Tuft feeder 17, 18, 19
Sliver deposit system, selecting 59 Tuft feeder, cleaning 232
Sliver feed 23 Twin-top cassette
Sliver monitoring, activating 86 Installing 293
Sliver trumpet, coiler 24 Removing 290
Sliver weight deviation 75 Type plates 10
Slow speed, setting 67
Slow-down time, cylinder 107
Specialist terms 316 U
Spectrogram 75 Unit for the sliver count, selecting 53
Speed limit, DFK roll, setting 62 Unit of measurement, selecting 53
Squeezing rolls, setting 88 Units, selecting 53
Standard clothings Upper trunk, tuft feeder, cleaning 232
Service intervals 256
Start key 27
Starting speed, setting 67 V
Stop key 27
Valves, checking 219
Storage 322
Vibration frequency, drive belts 210
Strips with clothing, replacing 291
V-ledge 95
Suction ducts 230
Suction funnel
Testing pneumatics 214
Suction hood, 1st licker-in, removing 288
W
Suction hoods, cleaning 230 Warnings 196
Suction pressure 64 Web doffer
Number of drives 60
Web doffing section 17, 18, 23
T Cleaning 245
WEBFEED
T-CON
Description 20
Checking 216
Item 17, 18
Description 35, 43
Webspeed
Gap recommendation 46
Testing pneumatics 214
Normal mode 43
WEBSPEED OPEN, setting 62
Putting into operation 79
WEBSPEED, cleaning 245
Switching monitoring on and off 69
Switching on and off 60
Temperature measurement 43
TC-PFS adjustment 95
TC-PMS opening angle, setting 99
336 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Postfach 41 01 64
Telephone +49 2166 607-0
Fax +49 2166 607-405
E-mail info@truetzschler.de

TC 5-1 and 5-3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TC 5-1 and 5-3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TC 5-1 and 5-3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 card

Type No. 914 22 62 / 914 22 42

Trützschler GmbH & Co. KG

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 9

Definition of machine sides

10 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

The type plate on the tuft feeder can be found be-

The type plate with the electrical connection data is

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 11

Organisational measures Avoiding machine damage

12 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 13

Safety devices on the machine

Master switch Door safety mechanisms

14 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Symbols employed Conventions employed in

1. Select the basic mask.

2. Start the machine.

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 15

16 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Functions of the machine

1 DIRECTFEED DFK tuft feeder 7 MULTI-WEBCLEAN system with fixed flats

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 17

1 DIRECTFEED DFK tuft feeder

18 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

DIRECTFEED tuft feeder

EASYFEED feed tray

The tray has a material feed monitoring system

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 19

WEBFEED licker-in unit (3 rolls)

WEBFEED licker-in unit (1 roll)

20 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

TC-PMS blade adjustment system

The degree of cleaning can be set infinitely variably

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 21

The MULTI WEBCLEAN system and the revolving flats system

1 Cover section (fixed arrangement) 11 Cleaning element (fixed arrangement)

22 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 23

Options for sliver delivery

CCA automatic coiler

With an automatic CCA coiler, the turnstile (6)

24 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

The card's operating unit

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 25

After a certain amount of time, the touch screen

26 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Inching key / inching mode

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 27

Basic mask, top rows

No. Symbol Designation Function or significance

28 914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010

Symbols for machine status Basic buttons

914 22 62 / 914 22 42 • TC 5-1 / TC 5-3 • en • 10/2010 29